JP2014180355A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine in which the amusement of a game is improved.SOLUTION: A game machine including a game board provided with at least a game area, and transmitting means provided in front of the game board comprises emitting means that is able to emit light at least to the transmitting means. The transmitting means is provided with at least first light emitting means. The transmitting means is provided with at least second light emitting means. The first light emitting means is able to at least guide light emitted by the emitting means, to the front. The second light emitting means is able to guide light emitted by the emitting means to the front. The first light emitting means is able to display at least in a first mode. The second light emitting means is able to display at least in a second mode. The first mode is different from the second mode.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine, a slot machine (pachislot machine), and an enclosed game machine.

  Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a start area where game balls can be won in the game area of the game board, and a symbol display unit that can display a plurality of symbols in a variable manner. When the symbol on the symbol display unit fluctuates for a predetermined time and the symbol after the change becomes a specific mode that is a combination of specific symbols determined in advance, the variable winning means is opened for a predetermined time, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state is generated (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  By the way, in the game stand as described in Patent Document 1, an effect that aims to improve interest is performed by an effect device represented by a movable body or the like.

  However, recently, there is an increasing demand for a new production device.

  The objective of this invention is providing the game stand which improves the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is a gaming machine comprising a gaming board provided with at least a gaming area, and transmission means provided on the front side of the gaming board, wherein light is transmitted to the transmission means. Irradiating means capable of irradiating at least, wherein the transmitting means is provided with at least a first light emitting means, and the transmitting means is provided with at least a second light emitting means, One light emitting means can at least guide the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side, and the second light emitting means can at least guide the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side. The first light emitting means is at least displayable in the first mode, and the second light emitting means is at least displayable in the second mode. Yes, said One embodiment, the a second aspect the different aspects, characterized in that.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a first embodiment of a configuration of a transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of a gaming table 100 as viewed from the front. It is a figure which shows the 2nd Example of a structure of the permeation | transmission part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic which looked at the permeation | transmission part 700 from the front. It is a figure which shows the 3rd Example of a structure of the permeation | transmission part based on this invention, Comprising: (a) is the schematic which looked at the game board 200 from the front, (b) is AA 'of (a). It is sectional drawing, (c) is BB 'sectional drawing of (a). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a fourth example of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the transmission unit 700 viewed from the front. It is a figure which shows the 5th Example of a structure of the permeation | transmission part based on this invention, Comprising: (a) is a schematic sectional drawing in the predetermined position of the permeation | transmission part 700, (b) is a position different from (a). It is a schematic sectional drawing of the transmissive part 700 of. It is a figure which shows the 6th Example of a structure of the permeation | transmission part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic which looked at the game board 200 from the front. It is a figure which shows the 7th Example of a structure of the permeation | transmission part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic which looked at the game board 200 from the front. It is a figure which shows the 8th Example of a structure of the permeation | transmission part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is a front view of an example of the concrete structure of the permeation | transmission part 700. FIG. It is a perspective view of the permeation | transmission part 700 shown in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the permeation | transmission part 700 shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the light emission means 701 used for the permeation | transmission part 700 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the board | substrate 701e shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board | substrate 701e from the light emission surface of the light source, (b) is the side view which made the board | substrate 701e the light source the upper side, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701e viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board | substrate 701f shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board | substrate 701f from the light emission surface of the light source, (b) is the side view which made the board | substrate 701f the light source the upper side, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701f as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board | substrate 701g shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board | substrate 701g from the light emission surface of the light source, (b) is the side view which made the board | substrate 701g the light source the upper side, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701g as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board | substrate 701h shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board | substrate 701h from the light emission surface of the light source, (b) is the side view which made the light source the board | substrate 701h the upper side, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701h as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board | substrate 701i shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board | substrate 701i from the light emission surface of the light source, (b) is the side view which made the board | substrate 701i the light source the upper side, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701i as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board | substrate 701j shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board | substrate 701j from the light emission surface of the light source, (b) is the side view which made the board | substrate 701j the light source the upper side, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701j as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a figure which shows the board | substrate 701k shown in FIG. 14, Comprising: (a) is the top view which looked at the board | substrate 701k from the light emission surface of the light source, (b) is the side view which made the board | substrate 701k the light source the upper side, c) is a bottom view of the substrate 701k as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. It is a perspective view which shows a mode that the board | substrate 701k is fixed to the inner side glass unit frame 704b. It is a perspective view which shows a mode that the transmissive member 703 is fixed to the inner side glass unit frame 704b, (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part E of (a), (C) is a perspective view which shows the state which fitted the permeation | transmission member 703 in (b). It is the figure which shows the 9th execution example of constitution of the transmission section which relates to this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic which saw the game board 200 from the front. (A) is a figure which shows the 10th Example of a structure of the permeation | transmission part based on this invention, Comprising: It is the schematic which looked at the permeation | transmission part 700 from the front, (b) is the permeation | transmission part concerning this invention FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an eleventh example having the configuration described above, and is a schematic view of a transmission unit 700 as viewed from the front. (A), (b) and (c) are figures which show another example of the light emission part used for the transmission part which concerns on this invention, Comprising: It is the top view seen from the light emission surface of the light source. It is a figure explaining an example of the slot machine which can apply the present invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display pattern in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display design of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration design, (c) FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a normal stop display pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is 1st. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the first sub control unit image processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is 2nd. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the determination table and the special figure determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) is for the validity determination used at the time of high probability An example of a table is shown, (b) shows an example of the success / failure determination table used at the low probability, and (c) shows an example of a special figure determination table. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation display time determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) is an example of a special figure 1 fluctuation | variation display time determination table. (B) shows an example of the special figure 2 variation time determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice table 1 used for the notice lottery 1 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. An example of the icon image displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area and the special figure 2 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention is shown in (a). An image representing a “circle” that is a hold icon displayed at the time of the pre-reading notice of “no change” is shown, and (b) shows “保留” that is a hold icon that is displayed at the time of the pre-reading notice of “hold A”. The character image shown is shown, and (c) shows the character image showing “Yoshimune”, which is a hold icon displayed at the time of prefetching notice of “hold B”. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure prefetch process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure prefetch process, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the process following FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process executed at a timing at which a first special figure starting port 230 or a second special figure starting port 232 wins. It is a flowchart of the change start sub-side prefetch notice execution process executed at the timing when the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game is started. It is a figure which shows the 12th Example of the structure of the permeation | transmission part based on this invention, Comprising: It is a figure of an example of the specific structure of the permeation | transmission part 700, (a) is a front view, (b) is (a) (C) is a figure which shows a mode that light is irradiated to the transmissive area | region shown in (b). (A), (b) is a figure explaining the point which makes the pattern which emerges differ by making the light source of a different position light-emit in the structure shown in FIG. (A), (b) is a figure explaining the point which makes the pattern which emerges differ by making the light source of a different position light-emit in the structure shown in FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the direction of the light source and the transmission region in the configuration shown in FIG. 45, where (a) is a diagram showing the direction of the light source, and (b) is surrounded by a rectangle A in (a). FIG. In the configuration shown in FIG. 45, (a) is a diagram showing the direction of the pattern and the light source, and (b) is surrounded by a dashed ellipse F in (a), for a lens cut that forms a pattern that emits light in the transmissive region. FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which removes and shows the half mirror combination 710a and 710b and the blade combination 711a and 711b from the game board 200 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the half mirror combination 710b shown in FIG. 51, (a) is a front perspective view, (b) is a rear perspective view. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 52. (A) is a front view of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 52, and (b) is an AA cross-sectional view of FIG. 54 (a). It is a figure explaining the structure of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 52, (a) is AA sectional drawing of Fig.54 (a), (b) is a half with arrangement | positioning of the blade | wing accessory 711b. It is a schematic diagram explaining the structure of the mirror accessory 710b. It is a front view explaining the structure of the half mirror combination 710b and the blade combination 711b shown in FIG. 50, (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the LED 717a, LED 717b and LED 717c are caused to emit light, (b), (C) And (d) is a figure which shows a mode that the blade accessory 711b is driven in the state which is not light-emitted LED717a, LED717b, and LED717c. It is a disassembled perspective view of the shielding apparatus 246 shown in FIG. 57 is a front view showing an example of a shielding device 246 different from FIG. 57, and (a), (b), and (c) are diagrams showing how the door of the shielding device 246 moves. FIG. It is the schematic which shows the structure of the shielding apparatus 246 shown in FIG. 57, (a) is a top view, (b) is a front view of the state which light-emitted left and right LED, (c) is upper and lower LED. FIG. 4D is a front view of a state in which the left, right, and upper and lower LEDs emit light. It is the schematic which shows the structure of the shielding apparatus 246 shown in FIG. 57, (a) is a front view which shows the pattern given to each door by the lens cut, (b) is a top view, (c) Fig. 4 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs as light sources provided in the frame portion, (d) is a front view showing a state where upper and lower LEDs provided at the ends emit light, and (e) is an illustration of the left and right LEDs and the center. It is a front view of the state which emitted light from the upper and lower LEDs. It is a figure which shows the example of the structure which laminates | stacks a some permeation | transmission part, and performs a light emission effect, Comprising: (a) is a front view of the state which laid flat without overlapping a some permeation | transmission part, (b) It is a perspective view of the state where the transmission part was piled up, (c) It is a perspective view showing a plurality of transmission parts piled up, and expanding a space, and (d) shows a pattern which carries out light emission production by laminating a plurality of transmission parts. It is a perspective view. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board 200 which shows the Example which piles up a some permeation | transmission part and produces a light emission effect. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board 200 which shows the Example which piles up a some permeation | transmission part and produces a light emission effect. (A)-(g) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order following FIG. 64 (a)-(g). (A)-(e) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(h) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(h) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(g) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG.68 (a)-(h). (A)-(h) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(h) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG.70 (a)-(h). (A)-(h) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208 and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG.71 (a)-(h). When the liquid crystal display device 208i different from the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided and the liquid crystal display device 208i performs a general symbol variation effect of the common symbol variation game, it is a diagram showing the symbol and pattern, (a) Shows an example of a stop pattern mode of a general figure that is stopped and displayed by the general figure display device 210 according to the result of the general figure variable game, and (b) shows a liquid crystal display device according to the result of the general figure variable game. 208i shows an example of a general-purpose decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed, and (c) shows the correspondence between the general-purpose decorative pattern of (a) and the general-purpose decorative pattern of (b). FIG. 7D is a diagram showing a pattern of a normal variation effect displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display device 208i. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the liquid crystal display device 208i, the display in the decoration design display device 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. 74 (a) to (h) are diagrams illustrating specific examples of effects produced by display on the liquid crystal display device 208i, display on the decorative symbol display device 208, and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion. (A)-(e) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, the 1st special symbol display apparatus 212, and the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 214, and the pattern 703e light-emitted on the transmissive member 703. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 80 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 as viewed from the front. It is a figure which shows the 13th Example of a structure of the permeation | transmission part based on this invention, Comprising: It is a figure of an example of the specific structure of the permeation | transmission part 700, (a) is a front view, (b) is (a) It is a figure which shows the state which made the pattern light-emit in the permeation | transmission area | region of the permeation | transmission part 700 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that light is irradiated to the transmissive area | region shown in FIG.83 (b). (A), (b) is a figure explaining the point which makes the pattern which emerges differ by making the light source of a different position light-emit in the structure shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. (A), (b) is a figure explaining the point which makes the pattern which emerges differ by making the light source of a different position light-emit in the structure shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. 83 and 84 are views for explaining the relationship between the direction of the light source and the transmission region, in which (a) is a diagram showing the direction of the light source, and (b) is a rectangle in (a). It is a figure which expands and shows the location enclosed by A. 83A and 83B, (a) is a diagram showing the direction of the pattern and the light source, and (b) is a broken-line ellipse in (a), with respect to the lens cut that forms the pattern that emits light in the transmissive region. It is a figure which expands and shows the location enclosed by F. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order after FIG. 90 (a)-(f). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order following FIG. 92 (a)-(f). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order following FIG. 94 (a)-(f). 96 (a) to 96 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG.94 (a)-(f). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG. 98 (a)-(f). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG. 100 (a)-(f). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG. 102 (a)-(f). It is a figure explaining the example of the production performed with the game board 200, Comprising: It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG. 105 (a)-(f). (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order following FIG. 106 (a)-(f). (A)-(e) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG. 107 (a)-(c). (A) And (b) is a figure explaining the example of the production performed with the game board 200, Comprising: It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. (A) And (b) is a figure explaining the example of the production performed with the game board 200, Comprising: It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. (A) And (b) is a figure explaining the example of the production performed with the game board 200, Comprising: It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. It is a figure explaining the example of the production performed with the game board 200, Comprising: It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order, following FIG.114 (a)-(d). (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order following FIG. 115 (a)-(d). (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order following FIG. 116 (a)-(d). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the light emission of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the example of the demonstration screen display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the light emission of the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the example of the demonstration screen display in the decorative design display apparatus 208, and the light emission of the pattern of a permeation | transmission part in order. (A)-(d) is a figure explaining the example of the production performed with the game board 200, Comprising: It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front.

<First embodiment>
The contents and technical ideas of the first to third embodiments and the examples described in them can be combined with each other as long as there is no fundamental defect, and more than three combinations and some configurations are possible. Addition and deletion can be set as appropriate.

  Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside of the front frame door 106 can be opened. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) (not shown) by the operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation A ball launching handle 134 for launching the game board 200 into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the chance button 1 6 is a chance button lamp 138 for emitting light, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) (not shown) installed in the game store, and a player's balance of the card unit. A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and card unit status are provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is positioned below the ball tank 150, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a sphere falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the sphere tank 150 to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The tank rail 154 is also referred to as a twin rail, and is disposed so that, for example, at least a part of the first sub-board 160 overlaps in the front-rear direction. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a tank rail 154 that may give noise to the control board is arranged to overlap the first sub board 160 in order to save the arrangement area of the members. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not affected by the noise of the first sub-board 160 even if the tank rail 154 and the first sub-board 160 are overlapped when the tank rail 154 has noise countermeasures. There are cases where it can be reduced. Since the tank rail 154 is provided with noise countermeasures, the side surface of the tank rail 154 can be formed of an insulating transparent member. Thereby, when the tank rail 154 is installed in the pachinko machine 100, the flow of the game ball on the tank rail 154 is visually confirmed through the side surface of the tank rail 154 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. There are cases where you can.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 from a payout passage 121 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 pays out a ball to the player with this configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing. The CR interface unit 186 includes a CR unit connection unit 186a configured with, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector. The CR interface unit 186 transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit via the CR unit connection unit 186a.

  For example, a volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 is provided on the upper left in the drawing of the first sub board case 162 that houses the first sub board 160. The volume adjustment switch 192 is constituted by a rotary switch, for example.

  The pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the back side. The relay board 196 is used for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when the gaming board 200 is exchanged, the gaming board 200 is exchanged while the main body 104 and the hall computer are connected via the relay board 196. The However, depending on the model, it is necessary to change the type of signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer. You may be comprised so that the connection condition of can be grasped | ascertained.

  Similarly, it is preferable that the main body 104 be provided with another configuration (for example, a power cord (not shown)) that needs to be connected to the outside.

  The pachinko machine 100 has a power connector 191 on the right side of the relay board 196 when viewed from the back side. A power cord (not shown) is connected to the power connector 191.

  When changing the model of the pachinko machine 100, the game board 200 is replaced. At this time, the main board 156, the first sub board 160, and the second sub control unit 500 may also be replaced. The board 156, the first sub board 160, and the second sub control unit 500 may be provided in the game board 200.

  Further, even when the model of the pachinko machine 100 is changed, the main body 104 may be used as it is without being replaced. At this time, the payout board 170, the launch board 174, and the power supply board 182 also need to be replaced. In some cases, the payout substrate 170, the launch substrate 174, and the power supply substrate 182 may be provided on the main body 104.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 (liquid crystal display device 208) is disposed substantially at the center, and an effect movable body 224 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a display device using EL or the like may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the lower right part of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is provided as the fourth decorative symbol after the decorative symbol displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. This 4th symbol is provided with a 4th symbol 219 for the special figure 1 for the special figure 1 and a 4th symbol 221 for the special figure 2 for the special figure 2, and an effect display area 208d (for example, Display at the bottom. The 4th symbol displays change / stop, for example, black indicates a stop display and gray indicates a change display.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. Has been established.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning.

  The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the usual figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a usual figure variable game by the ordinary figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right side of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a blade 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, one is provided below the center of the game board 200 and one below the right. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display devices 212 and 214 are hit by winning the special figure variable game. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times).

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

  The parts that can be contacted by the game balls such as the hitting ball direction changing member 236 and the game nails 238 are game parts that can be placed in the game area and can be contacted by the game balls that have been launched.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The rendering device 206 is driven and controlled by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball rided by the game nail 238 of the game board 200, and the like. On the stage 244 that is a rolling region, a game ball that has entered the receiving hole 244b is released from the discharge hole 244a that is a discharge unit, and the released ball is likely to enter the first special figure starting port 230. ing.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 moves up and down in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves.

  In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded.

  In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Configuration of transmission area>
Here, an example of the configuration of the transmissive region according to the present invention will be described.

  The present invention includes a game board 200 provided with a game area 124 and a transmission portion provided on the front side of the game board 200 and having a transmission area at least facing the game area 124. The transmission region of the transmission unit is irradiated with light from the light emitting unit, and the transmission unit includes a direction changing unit that changes the traveling direction of the light irradiated by the light emitting unit to the player side. It is provided at least in the first area and the second area, and the first area is brighter than the second area.

<< First Example >>
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a first embodiment of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the gaming table 100 as viewed from the front.

  In the first embodiment, a transmissive part 700 is provided in the gaming area 124 of the gaming table 100, and the transmissive part 700 is provided with a first area 720a and a second area 720b. In the first area 720a and the second area 720b, the light from the light emitting means is directed to the player side by the direction changing means described later in detail.

  In the first embodiment, the first region 720a emits light brighter than the second region 720b.

<< Second Example >>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a second embodiment of the configuration of the transmission part according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the transmission part 700 as seen from the front.

  In the second embodiment, light emitting means 701a and 701b for irradiating light to the transmissive portion 700 are provided on the side surface of the transmissive portion 700, and the first region 720a and the second region 720b of the transmissive portion 700 are provided. In the changing means, the light from the light emitting means 701a and 701b is directed to the player side.

  For example, the light emitting unit 701a is provided with a light source densely (with a narrow interval), and the light emitting unit 701b is provided with a light source roughly (with a wide interval), for example. In one area 720a, light is emitted brightly in a narrow area, and in the second area 720b in the vicinity of the light emitting means 701b, light is emitted darkly in a wide area.

<< Third Example >>
FIG. 6 is a view showing a third embodiment of the structure of the transmission portion according to the present invention, wherein (a) is a schematic view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front, and (b) is a view of (a). It is AA 'sectional drawing, (c) is BB' sectional drawing of (a).

  In the third embodiment, the region 720 includes a first region 720a and a second region 720b. In both the first region 720a and the second region 720b, the direction changing means 700a are provided at substantially equal intervals (see FIGS. 6B and 6C). On the other hand, the distance from the light sources 702a and 702b to the transmission unit 700 is longer for the light source 702a. For this reason, the number of light beams incident on the transmissive portion 700 is greater from 702b, and the first region 720a shown in FIG. 6C is more than the second region 720b shown in FIG. 6B. Brightly emits light.

<< 4th Example >>
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a fourth example of the configuration of the transmission part according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the transmission part 700 as seen from the front.

  In the fourth embodiment, the direction of light irradiation is different between the light source 702c (for example, LED) of the light emitting unit 701c that irradiates light to the transmission unit 700 and the light source 702d (for example, LED) of the light emitting unit 701d.

  The light emitting means 701d as the first light emitting means is provided on the first curved surface, and the light emitting means 701d as the second light emitting means is provided on the second curved surface. The second aspect includes a section D having a higher curvature than that of the first curved surface, and the light source 702c irradiates light in a direction different from that of the light source 702d by being provided in the section D.

<< Fifth embodiment >>
FIG. 8 is a view showing a fifth embodiment of the structure of the transmission part according to the present invention, in which (a) is a schematic sectional view of the transmission part 700 at a predetermined position, and (b) is (a). It is a schematic sectional drawing of the permeation | transmission part 700 in a different position.

  In the fifth embodiment, the arrangement interval of the direction changing means 700a in the first region 720a is narrower than the arrangement interval of the direction changing means 700b in the second region 720b. For this reason, the light flux whose direction can be changed by the direction changing means 700a is larger than the light flux whose direction can be changed by the direction changing means 700b, and is shown in FIG. 8A rather than the second region 720b shown in FIG. The first region 720a emits light brighter.

<< Sixth Embodiment >>
FIG. 9 is a view showing a sixth embodiment of the structure of the transmission portion according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In a predetermined area 720 of the transmissive portion 700, the light from the light source 702 is light-displayed with a predetermined pattern by changing the traveling direction to the player side by direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, a character is displayed as the predetermined pattern, but the predetermined pattern may be a character or the like in addition to various images.

  The region 720 includes a second region 720b that emits light and displays darker than the first region 720a in addition to the first region 720a that displays light and displays brightly.

  The direction changing means may not be provided in an area through which the game ball 101 passes. Further, in a region through which the game ball 101 passes, direction changing means may be provided so as to shine thinner than the diameter of the game ball 101. In a region through which the game ball 101 passes, a predetermined pattern may be brightly displayed, and the direction changing means may be provided so that the game ball 101 shines thicker than the diameter of the game ball 101 (for example, solid paint).

  The area through which the game ball 101 passes includes, for example, the vicinity of the launch rails 202 and 204, the periphery of the nail that the game ball 101 hits first, the start opening (first special figure start opening, second special figure start opening, and general start It may include a mouth (called a gate or through chucker)) and a windmill (hit ball changing member).

  Even in a region where the game ball 101 does not pass (cannot pass), the direction changing means may not be provided. For example, the direction changing means may not be provided near the liquid crystal display device 208 or the movable object 224 provided in the game area 124.

  Further, the direction changing means is in the vicinity of the area of the device for displaying information related to the game (for example, the area where the special symbol display device, the universal diagram display device, the holding lamp, etc. are arranged, the region where the fourth symbol is displayed). In this case, the state of the game (whether the symbol is changing, is stopped, is the hold stored, is highly probable, is a big hit, is right-handed, etc.) is always visible It may be possible to prevent the game from being affected.

<< Seventh embodiment >>
FIG. 10 is a view showing a seventh embodiment of the structure of the transmission portion according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In a predetermined region 720 of the transmission unit 700, the light from the light source 702 is light-displayed with a predetermined pattern by changing the advancing direction to the player side by direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 10). In FIG. 10, a character is displayed as the predetermined pattern, but the predetermined pattern may be a character or the like in addition to various images.

  The region 720 includes a second region 720b that emits light and displays darker than the first region 720a in addition to the first region 720a that displays light and displays brightly.

  The first region 720a may be brightly displayed because it is close to the light source 702, and the second region 720b may be displayed darkly because it is far from the light source 702.

<< Eighth embodiment >>
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an eighth example of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a front view of an example of a specific configuration of the transmission unit 700. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the transmission part 700 shown in FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the transmission part 700 shown in FIG.

  The transmissive part 700 makes a lens cut at a position corresponding to the first region and the second region described above, and transmits light from the side surface of the transmissive member 703 and the transmissive member 703 that plays a role as a direction changing unit. Light-emitting means 701, an outer glass 705 provided on the player side of the transparent member 703, an inner glass 706 provided on the opposite side of the transparent member 703, an outer glass unit frame 704a into which the outer glass 705 is fitted, An inner glass unit frame 704 b into which the inner glass 706 is fitted is formed, and each member is fixed with screws 707 in a state where a transmissive member 703 is inserted between the outer glass 705 and the inner glass 706.

  The outer glass unit frame 704a and the inner glass unit frame 704b constitute a glass unit frame 704. A handle 704c is provided above the glass unit frame 704 so that the operator can easily carry it.

  A connector 708 that supplies power to a light source (for example, LED) of the light emitting means 701 is exposed on the outer periphery of the glass unit frame 704.

  FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing the light emitting means 701 used in the transmission part 700 shown in FIG.

  The light emitting means 701 is configured by arranging a plurality of substrates 701e, 701f, 701g, 701h, 701i, 701j and 701k on which a light emitting unit, which will be described later, is mounted, on the outer periphery of the transmissive member 703. Depending on the outer peripheral shape of the transmissive member 703, a long substrate (for example, the substrate 701f) can be disposed at a portion where the curvature of curvature is small, and the portion where the curvature is large is between a predetermined substrate and another substrate (for example, the substrate). 701k and the substrate 701e). A rigid substrate can be used for the plurality of substrates 701e to 701k, and a flexible substrate may be used.

  The electric circuit on the substrate that supplies power to the light source may be a circuit in which a plurality of light sources (for example, LEDs) are connected in series.

  15A and 15B are diagrams showing the substrate 701e shown in FIG. 14, wherein FIG. 15A is a plan view of the substrate 701e viewed from the light emitting surface of the light source, and FIG. 15B is a side view of the substrate 701e with the light source facing upward. (C) is a bottom view of the substrate 701e viewed from the opposite side of the light emitting surface of the light source.

  The substrate 701e has three light sources 702e1, 702e2, and 702e3, which are arranged at almost equal intervals. A connector 708e that supplies power to the light sources 702e1 to 702e3 is disposed on the back surface of the substrate 701e and directly below the light source 702e3.

  16A and 16B are diagrams showing the substrate 701f shown in FIG. 14, wherein FIG. 16A is a plan view of the substrate 701f viewed from the light emitting surface of the light source, and FIG. 16B is a side view of the substrate 701f with the light source facing upward. (C) is a bottom view of the substrate 701f as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

  The substrate 701f has six light sources 702f1, 702f2, 702f3, 702f4, 702f5, and 702f6, which are arranged at almost equal intervals. A connector 708f that supplies power to the light sources 702f1 to 702f6 is disposed on the back surface of the substrate 701f and immediately below the light source 702f1.

  The substrate 701f has a screw hole 709f for screwing to the glass unit frame 704 at one end thereof. When the board 701f is bent and fixed to the glass unit frame 704, the screw hole 709f is widened (widened in the longitudinal direction of the board 701f) so that the position where the board 701f is fixed may be shifted. .

  17A and 17B are diagrams showing the substrate 701g shown in FIG. 14, wherein FIG. 17A is a plan view of the substrate 701g viewed from the light emitting surface of the light source, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the substrate 701g with the light source facing upward. (C) is a bottom view of the substrate 701g as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

  The substrate 701g has four light sources 702g1, 702g2, 702g3, and 702g4, which are arranged at almost equal intervals. A connector 708g for supplying power to the light sources 702g1 to 702g4 is disposed on the back surface of the substrate 701g and between the light sources 702g2 and 702g3.

  The substrate 701g has a screw hole 709g for screwing it to the glass unit frame 704 at one end thereof. The shape of the screw hole 709g is such that when the substrate 701g is bent and fixed to the glass unit frame 704, the hole is widened (widened in the longitudinal direction of the substrate 701g) so that the position for fixing the substrate 701g may be shifted. .

  18A and 18B are diagrams showing the substrate 701h shown in FIG. 14, wherein FIG. 18A is a plan view of the substrate 701h viewed from the light emitting surface of the light source, and FIG. 18B is a side view of the substrate 701h with the light source facing upward. (C) is a bottom view of the substrate 701h viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

  The substrate 701h has four light sources 702h1, 702h2, 702h3, and 702h4, which are arranged at almost equal intervals. A connector 708h for supplying power to the light sources 702h1 to 702h4 is disposed on the back surface of the substrate 701h and directly below the light source 702h2.

  The substrate 701h has a screw hole 709h for screwing to the glass unit frame 704 at one end thereof. When the board 701h is bent and fixed to the glass unit frame 704, the screw hole 709h has a wide hole (widens in the longitudinal direction of the board 701h) so that the position for fixing the board 701h may be shifted. .

  FIGS. 19A and 19B are diagrams showing the substrate 701i shown in FIG. 14, wherein FIG. 19A is a plan view of the substrate 701i viewed from the light emitting surface of the light source, and FIG. 19B is a side view of the substrate 701i with the light source facing upward. (C) is a bottom view of the substrate 701i as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

  The substrate 701 i has six light sources 702 i 1, 702 i 2, 702 i 3, 702 i 4, 702 i 5, and 702 i 6, which are arranged at almost equal intervals. A connector 708i that supplies power to the light sources 702i1 to 702i6 is disposed on the back surface of the substrate 701i and between one end of the substrate 701i and the light source 702i1. At one end of the substrate 701i, a long region where no light source is arranged is secured.

  The substrate 701 i has a screw hole 709 i for screwing to the glass unit frame 704 at the other end. The shape of the screw hole 709i is such that when the substrate 701i is bent and fixed to the glass unit frame 704, the hole is widened (expanded in the longitudinal direction of the substrate 701i) so that the position where the substrate 701i is fixed may be shifted. .

  20A and 20B are diagrams showing the substrate 701j shown in FIG. 14, wherein FIG. 20A is a plan view of the substrate 701j viewed from the light emitting surface of the light source, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the substrate 701j with the light source facing upward. (C) is a bottom view of the substrate 701j as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

  The substrate 701j has four light sources 702j1, 702j2, 702j3, and 702j4, which are arranged at almost equal intervals. A connector 708j that supplies power to the light sources 702j1 to 702j4 is disposed on the back surface of the substrate 701j and between the light sources 702j1 and 702j2.

  FIG. 21 is a view showing the substrate 701k shown in FIG. 14, wherein (a) is a plan view of the substrate 701k as viewed from the light emitting surface of the light source, and (b) is a side view of the substrate 701k with the light source facing upward. (C) is a bottom view of the substrate 701k as viewed from the side opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source.

  The substrate 701k includes four light sources 702k1, 702k2, 702k3, and 702k4, which are arranged at almost equal intervals. A connector 708k that supplies power to the light sources 702k1 to 702k4 is disposed on the back surface of the substrate 701k and between the light sources 702k1 and 702k2.

  FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing how the substrate 701k is fixed to the inner glass unit frame 704b.

  A predetermined portion of the inner glass unit frame 704b has a claw portion 701kaa for fixing one end of the substrate 701k. With the one end of the substrate 701k hooked on the claw portion 701kaa, the top of the fixing member 701kb is attached to the other end of the substrate 701k. It is mounted on the surface portion 701ka1, and the fixing member 701kb is fixed to the inner glass unit frame 704b with a screw 701kb. Thereby, the other end of the substrate 701k is sandwiched and fixed between the inner glass unit frame 704b and the fixing member 701kb.

  FIGS. 23A and 23B are perspective views showing a state in which the transmissive member 703 is fixed to the inner glass unit frame 704b. FIG. 23A is a perspective view, and FIG. 23B is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion E of FIG. It is a figure and (c) is a perspective view which shows the state which fitted the permeation | transmission member 703 in (b).

  In the transmission part 700, the outer glass unit frame 704a and the inner glass unit frame 704b are configured such that, for example, the rotation member 703 is relatively rotated around one end and opened, and the transmission member 703 sandwiched therebetween can be easily replaced. Yes.

  The inner glass unit frame 704b has a protrusion 703aa at a predetermined position, and the transmission member 703 has a notch 703a at a position corresponding to the protrusion 703aa.

  When the transmission member 703 is fixed to the inner glass unit frame 704b, the projection 703aa is provided, and the transmission member 703 fits the projection 703aa and the notch 703a. Thereby, the ease of removal when removing the transmissive member 703 from the inner glass unit frame 704b may be improved. A plurality of combinations of the protrusion 703aa and the notch 703a may be provided on the outer periphery of the transmission member 703. In FIG. 23, two places are provided obliquely above.

<< Ninth embodiment >>
FIG. 24 is a view showing a ninth embodiment of the structure of the transmission portion according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the game board 200 as seen from the front.

  In a predetermined area 720 of the transmission unit 700, light from a light source (not shown in FIG. 24) is changed to a player side by a direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 24) to emit a predetermined pattern. indicate. In FIG. 24, as a predetermined pattern, a portion indicated by gray such as a character “Yoshimune” and a frame around it is displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  The area 720 where the light emission display is performed can be, for example, a place where the game ball does not pass, but even if the game ball passes, the game ball passes when there is only a possibility of going to the out port 240 already. The location to be displayed may be a location for light emission display.

<< Tenth embodiment >>
FIG. 25A is a diagram showing a tenth example of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the transmission unit 700 viewed from the front.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined area 720 of the transmission unit 700 has a predetermined pattern in which the light from the light source 702 is changed to the player side by the direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 25A). Is displayed. In FIG. 25 (a), as a predetermined pattern, the letters “heat” and surrounding stars are displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  The light source 702 is disposed at a position near the predetermined region 720 (lower part in FIG. 25A) and a position facing the light source 702 (upper part in FIG. 25A).

<< Eleventh embodiment >>
FIG. 25B is a diagram illustrating an eleventh embodiment of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a schematic view of the transmission unit 700 viewed from the front.

  In this embodiment, in a predetermined area 720 of the transmission unit 700, the light from the light source 702 is changed to a predetermined pattern by changing the traveling direction to the player side by means of direction changing means (not shown in FIG. 25B). Is displayed. In FIG. 25 (b), as the predetermined pattern, the letters “heat” and the surrounding stars are displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  In this embodiment, the light sources 702 are arranged substantially evenly on the entire outer periphery of the transmission part 700, and this corresponds to the case where the predetermined region 720 extends over the entire transmission part 700. However, even when the light sources 702 are arranged substantially evenly, the predetermined pattern does not necessarily emit light evenly due to the outer shape of the transmission part, the difference in the distance from the light source 702 to the pattern, and the like.

<Another configuration example of the light emitting means>
26 (a), (b) and (c) are diagrams showing another example of the light emitting unit used in the transmission unit according to the present invention, and are plan views seen from the light emitting surface of the light source.

  In the example of FIG. 26A, light sources 702m1, 702m2, and 702m3 are arranged on a substrate 701m.

  In the example of FIG. 26B, light sources 702n1, 702n2, 702n3, and 702n4 are arranged on the substrate 701n.

  In the example of FIG. 26C, light sources 702p1, 702p2, 702p3, and 702p4 are arranged on the substrate 701p.

  Each light source may be arranged in one row, or in a plurality of rows as shown in FIGS. 26 (a), (b) and (c). In addition, although the light source is arrange | positioned in the substantially horizontal direction with respect to each board | substrate, it is not necessarily limited to this, You may arrange | position a light source toward a board | substrate from a slightly diagonal direction.

<Application to slot machines>
The game machine according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 27, “a plurality of types of symbols 1002 and a plurality of reels 1002 which are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is won, and a lottery result The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position where the variable display device 1022 is shielded And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 changes the design when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins. It is also suitable for a slot machine 1000 ”which is a presentation device 1010 that produces a game by stopping and displaying the game.

<Application to enclosed game machines>
The gaming machine according to the present invention is also applicable to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a gaming machine.

<Second Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside of the front frame door 106 can be opened. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) (not shown) by the operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation , A ball launch handle 134 for launching the game board 200 into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 30) by the player's operation, and a chance button 36, a chance button lamp 138 for emitting light, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) (not shown) installed in the game store, and a player's balance for the card unit. A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and card unit status are provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 29 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 28 viewed from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is positioned below the ball tank 150, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a sphere falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the sphere tank 150 to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The tank rail 154 is also referred to as a twin rail, and is disposed so that, for example, at least a part of the first sub-board 160 overlaps in the front-rear direction. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a tank rail 154 that may give noise to the control board is arranged to overlap the first sub board 160 in order to save the arrangement area of the members. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not affected by the noise of the first sub-board 160 even if the tank rail 154 and the first sub-board 160 are overlapped when the tank rail 154 has noise countermeasures. There are cases where it can be reduced. Since the tank rail 154 is provided with noise countermeasures, the side surface of the tank rail 154 can be formed of an insulating transparent member. Thereby, when the tank rail 154 is installed in the pachinko machine 100, the flow of the game ball on the tank rail 154 is visually confirmed through the side surface of the tank rail 154 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. There are cases where you can.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 from a payout passage 121 (see FIG. 28) disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 pays out a ball to the player with this configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing. The CR interface unit 186 includes a CR unit connection unit 186a configured with, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector. The CR interface unit 186 transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit via the CR unit connection unit 186a.

  For example, a volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 is provided on the upper left in the drawing of the first sub board case 162 that houses the first sub board 160. The volume adjustment switch 192 is constituted by a rotary switch, for example.

  The pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the back side. The relay board 196 is used for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when the gaming board 200 is exchanged, the gaming board 200 is exchanged while the main body 104 and the hall computer are connected via the relay board 196. The However, depending on the model, it is necessary to change the type of signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer. You may be comprised so that the connection condition of can be grasped | ascertained.

  Similarly, it is preferable that the main body 104 be provided with another configuration (for example, a power cord (not shown)) that needs to be connected to the outside.

  The pachinko machine 100 has a power connector 191 on the right side of the relay board 196 when viewed from the back side. A power cord (not shown) is connected to the power connector 191.

  When changing the model of the pachinko machine 100, the game board 200 is replaced. At this time, the main board 156, the first sub board 160, and the second sub control unit 500 may also be replaced. The board 156, the first sub board 160, and the second sub control unit 500 may be provided in the game board 200.

  In addition, even when the model of the pachinko machine 100 is changed, the main body 104 may be used as it is without being replaced. In some cases, the payout substrate 170, the launch substrate 174, and the power supply substrate 182 may be provided on the main body 104.

  FIG. 30 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 (liquid crystal display device 208) is disposed substantially at the center, and an effect movable body 224 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a display device using EL or the like may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the lower right part of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is provided as the fourth decorative symbol after the decorative symbol displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. This 4th symbol is provided with a 4th symbol 219 for the special figure 1 for the special figure 1 and a 4th symbol 221 for the special figure 2 for the special figure 2, and an effect display area 208d (for example, Display at the bottom. The 4th symbol displays change / stop, for example, black indicates a stop display and gray indicates a change display.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. Has been established.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning.

  The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the usual figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a usual figure variable game by the ordinary figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right side of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a blade 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, one is provided below the center of the game board 200 and one below the right. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display devices 212 and 214 are hit by winning the special figure variable game. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times).

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

  The parts that can be contacted by the game balls such as the hitting ball direction changing member 236 and the game nails 238 are game parts that can be placed in the game area and can be contacted by the game balls that have been launched.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The rendering device 206 is driven and controlled by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball rided by the game nail 238 of the game board 200, and the like. On the stage 244 that is a rolling region, a game ball that has entered the receiving hole 244b is released from the discharge hole 244a that is a discharge unit, and the released ball is likely to enter the first special figure starting port 230. ing.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 moves up and down in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The shielding device 246 includes left doors 246a and 246b and right doors 246c and 246d, and is disposed on the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 57, a moving mechanism 246e capable of moving each of the left door 246a and the right door 246c in the left-right direction is provided above the left door 246a and the right door 246c.

  Each of the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 57, and is configured by providing a transparent transmission portion inside the opaque frame portion.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 retention lamp 220, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 222) And the like, and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. Note that the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to one-way communication from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and bidirectionally transmits signals such as commands between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400. You may be comprised so that transmission is possible.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, and a chance button detection for detecting the pressing of each button provided in the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 139. Based on signals from the sensor 426, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430 and the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, and signals from the CPU 404. The image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out And generating a display image by using the work area of VRAM436 Te and displays images on the decorative pattern display device 208 VDP434 (Video Display Processor), it is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 502 also includes a ROM 506 storing control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like, and drive control for the effect movable body 224. Control of drive circuit 516, effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of effect movable body 224, sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal from effect movable body sensor 424 to basic circuit 502, and control of game board lamp 532 A game board lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, a game board lamp driving circuit 530, and a game table frame lamp driving circuit. A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication with the 540 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32A to 32C, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described.

  FIG. 32 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present embodiment) elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, When the variation time determined before the start of the variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special illustration 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 32 (a) shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 32 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to an electric support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). Although the electric support state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the electric support state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the electric support state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R. “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the electric support state. In the case of “special drawing E” and “special drawing F”, when the state of the normal figure when the big hit is the normal figure high probability state, the game state of the normal figure after the big hit is the normal figure high probability state. Thus, it is configured so that the electric support state does not end due to the big hit.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small bonus symbol, both of which are the symbols that are in the gaming state when the small hit is made. For example, if the gaming state at the time of small hit is the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state will be entered after the small hit and the gaming state at the time of small hit will be If it is in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is obtained even after the end of the small hit. The small hits here indicate almost the same attacker behavior as the big hits without 2R electric support. That is, the “special drawing G” and the “special drawing H” are in the same state as the “special drawing E” and the “special drawing F”, and the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are also set in the same manner. It is possible to expect the gaming state of the special figure to shift with a high probability.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss in the determination of success / failure, and then, based on the result of the determination of success / failure, It is configured to determine which of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” is to be stopped and displayed on Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 display devices 212 and 214 after the symbol variation display. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display, so that the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game (for example, the special figure certain change state) The presence / absence of the power supply and the presence / absence of the electric support state are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this. For example, apart from the determination of the stop symbol, the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game may be determined by lottery. The pachinko machine 100, for example, automatically determines the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the stop symbol is determined, whereas the pachinko machine 100 determines the profit state after the jackpot game by lottery, The profit status may be appropriately associated.

  FIG. 32 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. In the following drawings, “decorative display of decorative design” may be indicated by an arrow, but actually the decorative design to be displayed may be switched in this way.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” or 15R big jackpot of “Special Figure B”, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1− (Decoration 1 -decoration 1 "," decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7”). -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 32B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 32C shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 32 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main controller shown in FIG.

  In step 10101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step 10103 following step 10101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step 10105 following step 10103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply has been shut off), the process returns to Step 10103. If the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 has not detected that the power supply has been cut off), the step is performed. Proceed to 10107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step 10103, and step 10105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step 10107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step 10109 following step 10107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption). If the state before power interruption does not return (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of setting to an initial state, the process proceeds to an initialization process (step 10113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a game store clerk or the like operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicating that there has been an operation). It is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step 10113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step 10113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step 10111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step 10113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step 10113.

  In step 10111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step 10115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 31 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step 10111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step 10233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step 10113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step 10113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power recovery command, in step 10233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the first command is returned. 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step 10115 next to step 10113, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, when it is determined whether or not it is a big hit or not, a random number value for determining a special figure for winning time used for a lottery to determine a stop symbol in special figure variable games is generated. The initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial value of the winning special figure determining random number counter (hereinafter referred to as “initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter”). ). Also, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a universal winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number for use in determining whether or not a normal floating game is successful (hereinafter referred to as “corresponding to the normal winning random counter”). "Initial value generation random number counter"). For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the random number value for determining the special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, the value is stored from the initial value generating random number counter storage area corresponding to the random number counter for determining the special figure for winning hour provided in the RAM 308. Acquire, add 1 to the acquired value, and store in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the usual winning random number counter is updated in the same manner. Note that the initial value generating random number counters corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter and the common winning random number counter are also updated in step 10207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step 10115 except during the timer interrupt process starting at predetermined intervals.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step 10201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step 10203 after step 10201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step 10205 following step 10203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step 10205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the storage areas of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step 10205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 31, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal) is stored. In step 10205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the normal figure starting opening 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step 10207 following step 10205 and step 10209 next thereto, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process in step 10207, the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter and the universal winning random number counter respectively performed in step 10115 is updated. In the basic random number update process of step 10209, the special symbol determining random number counter for winning hour and the normal winning random number counter used in the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as random numbers for determining a special figure for hitting is 0 to 99, a random number counter for determining a special figure for hitting provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate a random number for determining a special figure for hitting hours Is obtained, and 1 is added to the obtained value, which is then stored in the original random number counter for determining a hit special figure. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for determining a hit time special figure. In addition, when it is determined as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value that the winning-time special figure determining random number counter makes a round, the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the winning special figure determining random number counter Is set in the random counter for determining the special figure for winning hour. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for hitting special figure determination that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for determining the winning hour figure, and The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to set the figure-determining random number counter and to determine that the winning-time special figure determining random number counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the winning special figure determining random number counter has made one round next, an initial value for determining that the common winning random number counter has made one round A storage area is provided in the RAM 308. The hit special figure determining random number counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same. The counter may be used.

  In step 10211 following step 10209, the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the special figure timer number determination random number counter for generating the special figure timer number determination random number value for determining the symbol variation time in the special figure variation game is updated. In addition, a random number counter for determining a general timer number for generating a random number value for determining a general timer number for determining a symbol variation time in the general variable game is updated.

  In step 10213 following step 10211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step 10215 subsequent to step 10213, winning prize counter updating processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step 10217 following step 10215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step 10205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is obtained and provided in the RAM 308. The hit special figure determining random value is obtained from the hit special figure determining random number counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 1 random number value for determining hit and random number value for determining special figure for winning hour (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 random value group" or "special figure 1 start information") Are stored for the same number as the number of reserved special figure 1 stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 of the special figure 2 of 318 is acquired, and the hit time special feature provided in the RAM 308 is acquired. The random number value for hit special figure determination is acquired from the random number counter for figure determination and is stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 random number value for determining hit and random number value for determining special figure for winning time (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 random value group" or "special figure 2 start information") Are stored for the same number as the number of reserved special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number decreases, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remaining special figure 2 random value Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value as the normal figure winning random number value. Stored in the random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step 10219 following step 10217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step 10221 next to step 10219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-described general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (common symbol A shown in FIG. 32 (c)) or the off symbol (common symbol B shown in FIG. 32 (c)). Display. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 milliseconds (ms)). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off as will be described later. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step 10223.

  In step 10223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. When a winning determination is made and the winning combination is made, ON is set to the common winning flag provided in the RAM 308. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of variable times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step 10224 following step 10223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure pre-reading process, when there is a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, the starting information related to the holding increased due to the winning is pre-read, and the special symbol variable game stop pattern is specially designated. Pre-judgment is made prior to the success / failure judgment in the related lottery process.

  The special figure prefetching process in step 10224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure prefetching process, and FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special figure prefetching process and showing the process following FIG.

  In step 11101 in FIG. 41, first, it is determined whether or not the current control state is in electric support. (Step 11103), and if it is determined that there has been a winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 (step 11103: Yes), the winning determination random number value and the special figure for the winning hour related to the winning special figure 2 starting information The pre-determined random number value is pre-read, and prior to the determination of success / failure in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229 in FIG. 34), the special figure probability variation flag value, the pre-read hit determination random number value, and FIG. 37 (a). Alternatively, by using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 37 (b), a preliminary determination is made as to whether or not the success / failure determination is a big hit (step 11105). Yes) Proceed to step 11107, if it is a small hit (step 11105: No, step 11111: Yes), proceed to step 11113, and if it is not a big hit or small hit (step 11105: No, step 11111: No), proceed to step 11115. .

  Next, at step 11107, step 11113, and step 11115, the pre-reading special figure determining random number value and the special figure determining table shown in FIG. 37 (c) are used to stop display after the special figure 2 variable game. Pre-determine the symbol (stop symbol).

  Next, in step 11109, the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is determined using the stop symbol determined in advance, the random number value for determining the special figure timer number, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. (Special figure timer number) is determined in advance. Next, the pre-determination result (presence / absence determination result, stop symbol, special figure timer number) obtained by the pre-determination is stored in a special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. To do. The main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 2 variable game stop symbol and special figure timer number as the special figure 2 prefetching result in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit. Yes. In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit can store, for example, up to four special figure 2 prefetch results.

  The RAM 308 also has a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last). In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time.

  If it is determined in step 11101 of FIG. 41 that the current control state is not electric support (step 11101: Yes), the process proceeds to FIG. 42, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 start port 230 (step 11101). 11117), when it is determined that a winning is made to the special figure 1 starting port 230 (step 11117: Yes), the random number value for hit determination and the random number value for determining the special figure for winning hour are prefetched according to the winning special figure 1 starting information. Prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step 10231 in FIG. 34), the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pre-fetched random number for hit determination, and FIG. 37 (a) or FIG. 37 (b). Is determined in advance (step 11119), and if it is a big hit (step 11119: Yes). The process proceeds to step 11121, if Koatari proceeds to step 11127, neither a Koatari be big hit (step 11119: Yes: No, step 11125), the process proceeds to step 11129 (step 11119: No: No, step 11125).

  Next, at step 11121, step 11127, and step 11129, the pre-read special figure determining random number value and the special figure determining table shown in FIG. 37 (c) are used to stop display after the special figure 1 variable game. Pre-determine the symbol (stop symbol).

  Next, in step 11123, the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is determined using the stop symbol determined in advance, the random number value for determining the special figure timer number, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. (Special figure timer number) is determined in advance. Next, the predetermination result (presence / absence determination result, stop symbol, special figure timer number) obtained by the predetermination is stored in a special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. To do. The main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 1 variable game stop symbol and special figure timer number as a special figure 1 prefetch result in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. Yes. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit can store, for example, up to four special figure 1 prefetch results.

  The RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 1 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 1 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last). In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time.

  The special figure prefetching process is executed by referring to the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the validity determination, but a special determination table may be used for the prefetching process.

  In this special figure prefetching process, commands based on the result of the special figure prefetching process (for example, a prefetching result information command and a prefetching notice command) are set in the transmission information storage area.

  Next, returning to the description of FIG. 34, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed. Perform (step 10225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the turning on / off of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 30 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 32A is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart Probability flag is off, normal When the probability variation flag is also off, special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H, and the first off flag are on In this case, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I is turned on and the special figure J is turned on when the special flag I is turned on. Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special figure C), and a sudden short time symbol (special figure D). ), Hidden probability variation (special E), sudden normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special I) ) And the second off-set symbol (special symbol J). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step 10233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. Here, the electric support state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The game state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric chew extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step 10227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step 10227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step 10225 and step 10227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for special figure 2 is performed first (step 10229), and then the special figure related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). (Step 10231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229), a special figure 2 random value set is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. With reference to the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 37 (a) or FIG. 37 (b) for the hit determination random number value in the set of special figure 2 random value, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a small hit. Or whether it is off. Next, when the determination result is a big hit or a small hit, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure determination random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area obtained as shown in FIG. With reference to the figure determination table, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Although details will be described later, if the result of the determination is wrong, a random symbol value for determining a missing symbol is obtained separately, and the random symbol value is referred to the special symbol determining table shown in FIG. To decide.

  After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

The special drawing 1 related lottery process (step 10231) is also the same as the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229), and a description thereof will be omitted.
In step 10233 following step 10231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes 15R jackpot flag and 2R jackpot flag values stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, special chart probability variation flag values, and special chart related items. Including the special figure timer number selected in the lottery process, and in the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. In the case of a command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  In addition, in the prefetch result information command, prefetch result information (prefetched stop symbol information) stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the command data and the prefetched stop symbol correspond to the number of holds. Information indicating whether or not the information is on hold. The prefetch result information and the hold number information in the prefetch result information command may include only an increment, or may include prefetch result information and hold number information for all holds.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the number of the special figure timer selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In this step 10233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increasing process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step 10235 following step 10233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step 10237 following step 10235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 10205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step 10219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step 10239 following step 10237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. If the low voltage signal is on (when power supply is detected to be cut off), the process proceeds to step 10243. If the low voltage signal is off (when power supply is not cut off), the process proceeds to step 10241. In step 10241, timer interruption end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step 10201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step 10243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step 10301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step 10301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step 10303 following step 10301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step 10305. . In step 10305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step 10307 following step 10305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step 10309 subsequent to step 10307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step 10307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step 10311 subsequent to step 10309, when the press of the chance button is detected, the effect data updated in step 10309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step 10313 following step 10311, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step 10309, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step 10315 following step 10313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step 10309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step 10317 following step 10315, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step 10309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step 10319 following step 10317, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step 10309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step 10321 next to step 10319, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step 10309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step 10303. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step 10401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step 10501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step 10303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step 10303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step 10503 following step 10501, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step 10321 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of random numbers for other effects, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step 10313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step 10601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In Step 10603 following Step 10601, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to Step 10605; Wait for the input signal to be input. In step 10605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in Step 10601, the CPU 404 has information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step 10607 following step 10605, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step 10609 following step 10607, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step 10611; Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step 10611, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  The process of the 2nd sub control part 500 is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step 10701 in FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step 10701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step 10703 following step 10701, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step 10705. . In Step 10705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step 10707 following step 10705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step 10709 after step 10707, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step 10707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In Step 10711 following Step 10709, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step 10713 following step 10711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the processing returns to step 10703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step 10801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle. In step 10901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step 10703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Accordingly, in step 10703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step 10903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, a special figure variation game or the like in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the validity determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The data table shown in FIG. 37 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 37 (a) and 37 (b) are the special determination 2 or special determination determination process of special figure 2 in special figure 2 or special figure 1 lottery process (steps 10229 and 10231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. An example of the use determination table used is shown. FIG. 37A shows a table used during the special figure high probability, and FIG. 37B shows a table used during the special figure low probability.

  The determination table shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B includes “special figure probability” in the first column from the left, “random number range” in the second column, and “correction result” in the third column. It consists of

  The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 37 (a) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values: a numerical value 0 to 10,000, a numerical value 10001 to 11638, a numerical value 11639 to 11940, and a numerical value 11941 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 11941 to 65535, “hits” corresponding to the values 10001 to 11638, “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 11639 to 11940.

  The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 37 (b) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10162, a numerical value 10163 to 10464, and a numerical value 10465 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of success / failure” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10465 to 65535, “hits” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10162, “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10163 to 10464.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the acquired winning judgment to determine whether the result of the floating game shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 is a winning (winning) or a wrong winning (missing). Whether or not the random number is determined is determined by referring to the determination table. For example, if the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads the probability determination high probability table shown in FIG. 37A from the ROM 306, and the gaming state at the time of the determination is special. In the case of the low probability state shown in FIG. 37B, the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. 37B is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 37 (c) shows a special figure determination table used for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed after the end of symbol variation. The special figure determination table shown in FIG. 37 (c) is configured with items of "result / no-result determination result", "symbol random number range", and "stop symbol" from the left column. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 37A or FIG. 37B. As a result of the success / failure determination using the determination table, it shows a case where it is determined as “small hit”, and “out of” indicates a case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the determination of success / failure using the special figure determination table. Show.

  The item “design random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 37 (c) is a numerical value of a random number to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the hit special figure 1 or special figure 2 or the random value for determining the wrong pattern. The range is shown. The “design random number range” corresponds to the item “big hit” in the left column “result determination result”, the numerical value 0-49, the numerical value 50-69, the numerical value 70-77, the numerical value 78-83, the numerical value 84-91 and It is divided into six values of 92 to 99, and is divided into two values of 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 corresponding to “small hit”, and values of 0 to 49 and values corresponding to “out” It is divided into two of 50-99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 37C represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. “Stop symbol” corresponds to “special symbol A” corresponding to the value “0” to “49” and “special symbol B” corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 69, and “special symbol B” corresponding to the numerical value 70 to 77. "Special figure C", "Special figure D" corresponding to numerical values 78-83, "Special figure E" corresponding to numerical values 84-91, and "Special figure F" corresponding to numerical values 92-99 Each design aspect is assigned. In addition, the “stop symbol” has “stop symbol” and the range of the symbol random number is “special diagram G” corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 49, and “special symbol H” corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99. Each is assigned. Furthermore, the “stop symbol” has “stop” and the symbol random number ranges from “0” to “49” in the “random symbol” range. Assigned.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is configured to display the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure when the determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230 or the special figure 2 starting opening 232 is a big hit. 2 Refer to the special figure determination table for the obtained random number value for determining the special figure for winning hour to determine which stop symbols of "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F" are to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214. And decide.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 when the determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a small hit. Refer to the special figure determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for determining the special figure for winning hour to determine which stop symbol mode of "special figure G" or "special figure H" is to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214. To decide.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device when the determination result based on winning in the special figure 1 start port 230 or the special figure 2 start port 232 is out of place. It is determined with reference to the special figure determination table with respect to the acquired random symbol value for determining whether to stop and display any of the special symbol patterns of “Special Figure I” and “Special Figure J”. Note that the random symbol value for losing symbol determination is acquired from the random symbol counter for losing symbol determination provided in the RAM 308 when determining the symbol for stopping detachment.

  FIG. 38 shows an example of a special figure fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure fluctuation game.

  FIG. 38A shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step 10231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table shown in FIG. 38A is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the special figure 1 variable display time determination table includes “stop symbol”, “table”, “random number selection range”, “variable time” and “decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is composed of five items of “effect mode”.

  The “stop symbol” in the left column is a stop symbol determined using the special symbol determination table of FIG. 37 (c), and includes “special symbol A / special symbol B” and “special symbol C to special symbol H”. ”And two types of“ special map I / special map J ”. The “table” is divided into four “1” to “4” corresponding to the “stop symbols” divided into four. Table “1” corresponds to “Special Figure A / Special Figure B” of “Stop Symbol”, and Table “2” corresponds to “Special Figure C to Special Figure H”. The “table” selected when “stop symbol” is “special chart A / special chart B” indicates whether or not the gaming state at the time of determining the variation time is in the electric support state (presence of electric support) and the special chart 1 Regardless of the number of floating games held, the table “1” is common. In addition, the “table” selected when the “stop symbol” is “special chart C to special chart H” is a table regardless of the presence / absence of electric support at the time of variable time determination and the number of special figure variable game suspensions. “2” is common.

  When the “stop symbol” is “special diagram I / special diagram J”, the table “3” or the table “4” is selected depending on the presence / absence of the electric support at the time of determining the variation time and the number of suspensions of the special diagram 1 variable game. It is to be selected. If the special symbol I or J is determined as the stop symbol, there is no electric support and the number of special figure 1 variable games held is 3, the table “3” is selected and there is no electric support and the hold When the number is 0 to 2 or when there is electric support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table “4” is selected.

  “Random number selection range” on the right side of the “table” in the figure indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value. The random number value for determining the special figure timer number is acquired, for example, at the same time as the start information acquisition of the special figure 1 and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read out from the predetermined storage area when the variable display time of the special figure 1 is determined. It has become. In the table “1”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. In the table “2”, the “random number selection range” is not classified by numerical values. In the table “3”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 65000, a numerical value 65001 to 65400, a numerical value 65401 to 65500, and a numerical value 65501 to 65535. In the table “4”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535.

  “Variation time” on the right side of the “Random number selection range” indicates the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game. The “variable time” is “15000 ms” corresponding to the table “1” and the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1000, “45000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 1001 to 20000, and “65000 ms corresponding to the numerical values 20001 to 65535. "Is assigned to each. “Variation time” is assigned with “12000 ms” corresponding to the table “2” and the random number selection range of numerical values 0 to 65535. The “variation time” corresponds to the table “3”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 65000, “3000 ms”, the numerical values 65001 to 65400, “10000 ms”, and the numerical values 65401 to 65500. “60000 ms” and “60000 ms” are assigned to the numerical values 65501 to 65535, respectively. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “4”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 50000, “8000 ms”, the numerical values 50001 to 60000 corresponding to “10000 ms”, and the numerical values 60001 to 65000. “60000 ms” and “60000 ms” are respectively assigned to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” diagram indicates the special mode 1 variable game effect mode corresponding to the combination of the “stop symbol” and the selected “variable time”. Yes. The “effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” corresponds to “stop pattern” corresponding to “special chart A / special chart B”, “variable time“ 1500 ms ”,“ per normal reach ”, and variable time“ 45000 ms ”. “Per reach A” and “per reach B” corresponding to the fluctuation time “65000 ms”. In addition, in the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, the “stop symbol” is assigned “special drawing C to special symbol H” and “variable time“ 12000 ms ”is assigned“ chance turn-off ”. In addition, the “effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” is “stop symbol” corresponding to “special diagram I / special diagram J”, “variable shortening” corresponding to variable time “3000 ms”, and variable time “8000 ms”. Correspondingly, “out of”, “variable reach out” corresponding to fluctuation time “10000 ms”, “reach out of reach A” corresponding to fluctuation time “40000 ms”, “reach out of reach B” corresponding to fluctuation time “60000 ms” Are assigned to each.

  FIG. 38B shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol variable display in the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table shown in FIG. 38B is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 38 (b), the special figure 2 variable display time determination table includes “stop symbol”, “table”, “random number selection range”, “variable time” and “decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is composed of five items of “effect mode”.

  The “stop symbol” in the left column is a stop symbol determined using the special symbol determination table of FIG. 37 (c), and includes “special symbol A / special symbol B” and “special symbol C to special symbol H”. ”And three types of“ special map I / special map J ”. The “table” is divided into five “5” to “9” corresponding to the “stop symbols” divided into five. The numbers of “table” in the special figure 2 variable display time determination table are serial numbers from the “table” number in the special figure 1 variable display time determination table. The table “5” corresponds to “Special Figure A / Special Figure B” of “Stop Symbol”, and the table “6” corresponds to “Special Figure C to Special Figure H”. The “table” selected when “stop symbol” is “special chart A / special chart B” is the table “5” regardless of the presence / absence of electric support at the time of variable time determination and the number of special figure 2 variable games held. Is common. Further, the “table” selected when the “stop symbol” is “special chart C to special chart H” is a table regardless of the presence / absence of electric support at the time of determining the variation time and the number of suspension of the special diagram 2 variable game. “6” is common.

  When “Stop Symbol” is “Special Figure I / Special Figure J”, any of the tables “7” to “9” is selected according to the presence / absence of electric support at the time of variable time determination and the number of special figure 2 variable games held. Is to be selected. If the special symbol I or special symbol J is decided as the stop symbol, and there is electric support and the number of special figure 2 variable games is 1 to 3, the table “7” is selected and electric support is available. When the number of reservations is 0, the table “8” is selected, and when there is no electric support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table “9” is selected.

  “Random number selection range” on the right side of the “table” in the figure indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value. The random number value for determining the special figure timer number is acquired at the same time as the start information acquisition of the special figure 2, for example, stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and read out from the predetermined storage area at the time of determining the special figure 2 variable display time. It has become. In the table “5”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. In the tables “6” to “8”, the “random number selection range” is not classified by numerical values. In the table “9”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535.

  “Variation time” on the right side of the “Random number selection range” indicates the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable game. “Variation time” is “55000” corresponding to the table “5”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 1000, “45000 ms” corresponding to the numerical values 1001 to 20000, and “65000 ms corresponding to the numerical values 20001 to 65535. "Is assigned to each. “Variation time” is assigned with “12000 ms” corresponding to the table “6” and the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 65535. In addition, “1500 ms” is assigned to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “7” and the random number selection range of numerical values 0 to 65535. “Variation time” is assigned “8000 ms” corresponding to the table “8” and the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical values 0 to 65535. Further, the “variation time” corresponds to the table “9”, the random number selection range corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 50000, “8000 ms”, the numerical value 50001 to 60000 corresponding to “10000 ms”, and the numerical value 60001 to 65000. “60000 ms” and “60000 ms” are respectively assigned to the numerical values 65001 to 65535.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” diagram indicates the effect mode of the special figure 2 variable game corresponding to the combination of the “stop symbol” and the selected “variable time”. Yes. The “appearance mode on the decorative design display device” is “reach A” and “special drawing B” corresponding to the “stop figure”, “normal reach” corresponding to the fluctuation time of 15000 ms, and “reach A” corresponding to the fluctuation time of 45000 ms. "Per hit" and "per reach B" are assigned to correspond to the fluctuation time of 65000 ms. In addition, in the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “stop symbol” is assigned as “special symbol C to special symbol H” and “chance eyes are completely turned off” corresponding to the variation time of 12000 ms. In addition, the “appearance mode on the decorative symbol display device” corresponds to “stop symbol” corresponding to “special diagram I / special diagram J”, corresponding to a fluctuation time of 1500 ms, “super shortening” and a fluctuation time of 8000 ms. “Release”, “reach out of normal reach” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms, “reach out of reach A” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 40000 ms, and “reach out of reach B” corresponding to a fluctuation time of 60000 ms are assigned.

  FIG. 39 shows an example of the pending change advance notice lottery table 1 used in the pending change lottery process (step 11205 in FIG. 43) in the start winning sub-side prefetch notice execution process (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 43). ing.

  The hold change notice lottery table 1 is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, for example. The pending change advance notice lottery table 1 is used to determine whether or not to perform a prefetch notice effect by the decorative symbol display device 208. The pre-reading notice means a notice of whether or not the special figure variable game is pending. The pending change notice lottery table 1 is used in common in FIG. 1 and FIG. Here, as an example, the icons to be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area and the special figure 2 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are determined.

  FIG. 40 shows an example of icon images displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area and the special figure 2 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 40A shows an image representing a “circle” that is a hold icon displayed at the time of “No change” pre-reading notice, and FIG. 40B shows an image displayed at the time of pre-reading notice of “hold A”. FIG. 40C shows a character image representing “Yoshimune”, which is a hold icon displayed at the time of a pre-reading notice of “hold B”. .

  39. From the left column, the change change notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 39 has “change time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “no change”, “hold A”, “hold B”, and “movable body”. It is divided into six. "Variation time" is "variation time" determined using the special figure 1 or special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 38, and is a command in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the transmission setting process (step 10233), the fluctuation time transmitted as a special figure timer number from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms”, and “65000 ms”.

  The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” on the right side of the “variable time” diagram indicates the effect mode of the special figure variable game. The “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” is an association between “variation time” in the special figure 1 or special symbol 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 38 and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”. Corresponding to “variation time” so as to be the same. “10000 ms” is “normal reach loss”, “40000 ms” is “reach A loss”, “60000 ms” is “reach B loss”, “15000 ms” is “per normal reach”, and “45000 ms” is “per reach A” And “65,000 ms” is “per reach B”.

  “No change” on the right side of the “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” indicates that the “normal hold” icon in FIG. 40A is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the right side thereof. “Hold A” indicates that the “Hold A” icon in FIG. 40B is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “Hold B” on the right is “Hold B” in FIG. 40C. The icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the “movable body” on the right side indicates that the shielding device 246 is operated, for example. “No change”, “Hold A”, “Hold B”, and “Moving object” are the numerical value ranges of random numbers to be compared with the random number for holding change notice lottery acquired from the random number counter for holding change notice lottery provided in the RAM 408 They are divided into (0 to 99), and are divided into 6 pieces corresponding to “variation time”.

  When the “variation time” is “10000 ms”, a numerical value 0 to 89 is assigned to “no change” and a numerical value 90 to 99 is assigned to “holding A” as a numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the random number value for holding change notice lottery. Is assigned, and no numerical value is assigned to “hold B” and “movable body”. In FIG. 39, the fact that no numerical value is assigned is represented as “−”. When the “variation time” is “40000 ms”, the numerical value ranges from 0 to 39 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 40 to 69 are assigned to “hold A”, and the numerical value 80 is assigned to “hold B”. -95 are assigned, and numerical values 96-99 are assigned to the “movable body”. When the “variation time” is “60000 ms”, the numerical value ranges from 0 to 29 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 30 to 79 are assigned to “holding A”, and the numerical value 80 is set to “holding B”. -89 are assigned, and numerical values 90-99 are assigned to the “movable body”. When the “variation time” is “15000 ms”, the numerical value ranges from 0 to 69 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 70 to 95 are assigned to “hold A”, and the numerical value 96 is assigned to “hold B”. -97 are assigned, and numerical values 98-99 are assigned to the “movable body”. When the “variation time” is “45000 ms”, the numerical value ranges from 0 to 29 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 30 to 69 are assigned to “hold A”, and the numerical value 70 is assigned to “hold B”. -85 are assigned, and numerical values 86-99 are assigned to the “movable body”. When the “variation time” is “65000 ms”, the numerical value ranges from 0 to 19 are assigned to “no change”, the numerical values 20 to 49 are assigned to “hold A”, and the numerical value 50 is assigned to “hold B”. -79 are assigned, and numerical values 80-99 are assigned to the “movable body”.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the start winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process executed at the timing of winning the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232. This start side winning sub-side pre-reading notice execution process is executed, for example, in the effect control process (step 10309 in FIG. 35) of the first sub-control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step 11201, the state of the pre-reading execution flag is determined. If the pre-reading execution flag is not off (step 11201: No), the process proceeds to step 11213. If the pre-reading execution flag is off (step 11201: Yes), the variation time lottery in step 11109 or 11123 of this special figure prefetch process is in the “variation time” of the pending change notice lottery table 1 in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step 11203).

  In step 11203, if the current variation time is not in the “variation time” of the pending change notice lottery table 1 of FIG. 39 (step 11203: No), the process proceeds to step 11213. If the current variation time is in the “variation time” of the pending change advance notice lottery table 1 in FIG. 39 (step 11203: Yes), the pending change lottery process using the aforementioned pending change advance notice lottery table 1 in FIG. Is executed (step 11205).

  If the result of the lottery process in step 11205 is not a win (in the case of “no change” in FIG. 39) (step 11207: No), the process proceeds to step 11213. If the result of the lottery process in step 11205 is a win (in the case other than “no change” in FIG. 39) (step 11207: Yes), the number of pre-reading notices is set (step 11209), and the pre-reading execution flag is turned on. (Step 11211). In step 11213, a hold command is output and the process ends.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the change start sub-side prefetching notice execution process executed at the timing when the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game is started. This change-side sub-side prefetching notice execution process is executed, for example, in the effect control process (step 10309 in FIG. 35) of the first sub control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step 11301, the state of the pre-reading execution flag is determined. If the pre-reading execution flag is not on (step 11301: No), the process proceeds to step 11308. If the pre-reading execution flag is on (step 11301: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the number of pre-reading notice executions (step 11303), and it is determined whether the number of pre-reading notice executions as a result of 1 subtraction is 0 (step 11305). .

  In step 11305, if the number of pre-reading notice executions is not 0 (step 11305: No), the process proceeds to step 11308. If the pre-reading notice execution count is 0 (step 11305: Yes), the pre-reading execution flag is turned off (step 11307).

  In step 11308, a normal notice lottery process is executed, and in step 11309, a normal notice command is output and the process ends.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a twelfth example of the configuration of the transmission unit according to the present invention, and is a diagram of an example of a specific configuration of the transmission unit 700, (a) is a front view, and (b) (A) is a figure which shows the state which made the pattern light-emit in the transmissive area | region of the transmissive part 700 shown to (a), (c) is a figure which shows a mode that light is irradiated to the transmissive area | region shown to (b). is there.

  The transmissive part 700 irradiates light from a transmissive member 703 that functions as a direction changing means by, for example, cutting a lens at a position corresponding to the smile mark pattern of the transmissive regions 703b and 703c, and a side surface of the transmissive member 703. Light emitting means 701, an outer glass 705 provided on the player side of the transparent member 703, an inner glass 706 provided on the opposite side of the transparent member 703, an outer glass 705, the transparent member 703 and the inner glass 706. And a glass unit frame 704 to be fitted.

  The light emitting means 701 includes light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G, and 702H, which are LEDs, for example, and a connector 708 that supplies power to the light sources 702A to 702H is provided on the outer periphery of the glass unit frame 704. Exposed. When the light sources 702A to 702H are caused to emit light, the direction of the light is changed to the player side by the lens cut applied to the transmission regions 703b and 703c of the transmission member 703, and a smile mark pattern is emitted.

  FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 are diagrams for explaining that the patterns to be raised are made different by causing light sources at different positions to emit light in the configuration shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, the smile mark pattern (for example, eyes and mouth) 703ba in the transmissive region 703b is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702A and 702E to emit light. When the light sources 702A and 702E emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the pattern 703ba may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the smile mark pattern (for example, the outline of the face) 703bb in the transmissive region 703b is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702B and 702F to emit light. When the light sources 702B and 702F are caused to emit light, other patterns may be emitted, or only the pattern 703bb may be emitted.

  In this way, among the smile mark patterns in the transmissive region 703b, for example, by partially changing the direction of the lens cut, the light source to be reflected is made different, and the light source that emits light is controlled, so that one pattern is stepped. It is possible to emit light automatically.

  Emitting the smile mark patterns 703ba and 703bb in the transmissive region 703b is realized by causing the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E, and 702F to emit light. When the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E, and 702F emit light, the other patterns may emit light, or only the patterns 703ba and 703bb may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, the smile mark pattern (for example, the contour of the face) 703ca in the transmissive region 703c is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702C and 702G to emit light. When the light sources 702C and 702G emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the pattern 703ca may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 47B, the smile mark pattern (for example, eyes and mouth) 703cb in the transmissive region 703c is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702D and 702H to emit light. When the light sources 702D and 702H are caused to emit light, other patterns may be emitted, or only the pattern 703cb may be emitted.

  In this way, among the smile mark patterns in the transmissive region 703c, for example, by partially changing the direction of the lens cut, the light source to be reflected is made different, and the light source that emits light is controlled, so that one pattern is stepped. It is possible to emit light automatically.

  The smile mark patterns 703ca and 703cb in the transmissive region 703c are caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G, and 702H to emit light. When the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G and 702H are caused to emit light, other patterns may be emitted, or only the patterns 703ca and 703cb may be emitted.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the direction of the light source and the transmission region in the configuration shown in FIG. 45, where (a) is a diagram showing the direction of the light source, and (b) is the diagram in (a). It is a figure which expands and shows the location enclosed with the rectangle A. FIG.

  Light sources 702 </ b> A to 702 </ b> H are arranged around the side of the transmissive member 703 so as to emit light toward the center of the transmissive member 703. In each region of the transmissive member 703, the intensity of light received from the light source varies depending on the distance from the light source and the difference in orientation with respect to the light source. Here, the relationship between a region and a light source will be described for each of regions B, C, D, and E in FIG. 48B so that uniform light emission effects can be achieved in each region. The light output from each of the light sources 702A to 702H has directivity, the light that goes straight to the center in the direction facing the light source is the strongest, and the light that is weaker than the center goes straight in the oblique direction.

  The region B is irradiated with light from two upper and lower light sources (for example, the light sources 702A and 702E). In this area B, both the directions of the upper and lower light sources face each other, and strong light travels straight depending on the directivity of the light sources, but the light is attenuated because the distance from the upper and lower light sources is far. Therefore, in this region B, it is possible to secure the amount of light necessary for production by receiving light from the upper and lower light sources.

  The region C is irradiated with light from the lower one light source (for example, the light source 702E). This area C faces the direction of the lower one light source, and strong light goes straight due to the directivity of the light source, and the distance from this lower one light source is short. Therefore, in this area C, it is possible to secure the amount of light necessary for production by receiving light from the lower light source.

  The region D is close to a single light source (for example, the light source 702E), but is positioned obliquely with respect to this single light source, and receives less light than when facing directly. Therefore, in this region D, light from other nearby light sources (for example, the light source 702E) is also received, so that the amount of light necessary for production can be secured.

  The region E is close to the light source (for example, the light sources 702D and 702E), but is located in a large oblique direction with respect to the light source, and thus the light does not easily reach.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the direction of the pattern and the light source for the lens cut that forms the pattern that emits light in the transmissive region in the configuration shown in FIG. 45, and FIG. It is a figure which expands and shows the location enclosed by the ellipse F. FIG.

  A lens cut is applied to the transmission region 703d of the transmission member 703 so that a smile mark pattern can be emitted. Referring to the enlarged view of FIG. 49 (b), lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, and 703de are applied to portions surrounded by an ellipse F. Each of the lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, and 703de has different cut angles according to the direction of light emitted from the light source. For example, the lens cut 703dc has a cut in a direction facing the light source 702F, and the lens cut 703de has a cut in a direction facing the light source 702E.

  Note that, as described above, a pattern lens cut is applied to the transmission part, and the light emission display of the pattern is performed by directing light from the light source toward the player side. It may be referred to as “light emission display of applied pattern”.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the game board 200 different from that of FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  51 is an exploded perspective view showing the half mirror combination 710a and 710b and the blade combination 711a and 711b removed from the game board 200 shown in FIG.

  The basic configuration of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 50 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 30, so detailed description will be omitted and only different points will be described.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. In the effect device 206, half mirror objects 710a and 710b are arranged on both sides on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. A wing accessory 711a is provided behind the half mirror accessory 710a, and a wing accessory 711b, which is a movable body, is provided behind the half mirror accessory 710b.

  The wings 711a and 711b are moved in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  52 is a view showing the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 51, (a) is a front perspective view, and (b) is a rear perspective view. Since the half mirror accessory 710a has the same configuration as the half mirror accessory 710b, here, the configuration of the half mirror accessory 710b will be described as a representative.

  FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. FIG. 54 (a) is a front view of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 52, and FIG. 54 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 54 (a).

  The half mirror accessory 710 b is configured by stacking plate-like transparent members 713, 714 and 715 and a plate-like half mirror member 716 and attaching them to the base member 712. An LED substrate 717 is provided on the side of the plate-like transparent members 713, 714, and 715 so that light can be irradiated from the side of the plate-like transparent members 713, 714, and 715.

  FIG. 55 is a view for explaining the structure of the half mirror accessory 710b shown in FIG. 52, (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 54 (a), and (b) is a blade accessory 711b. It is a schematic diagram explaining the structure of the half mirror actor 710b with arrangement | positioning.

  The LED 717 a mounted on the LED substrate 717 is disposed on the side of the transparent member 713. The transparent member 713 is provided with a lens cut 713a that emits a pattern. The lens cut 713a reflects light emitted from the LED 717a to the front side (player side).

  The LED 717 b mounted on the LED substrate 717 is disposed on the side of the transparent member 714. The transparent member 714 is provided with a lens cut 714a that emits a pattern. The lens cut 714a reflects light emitted from the LED 717b to the front side (player side).

  The LED 717 c mounted on the LED substrate 717 is disposed on the side of the transparent member 715. The transparent member 715 is provided with a lens cut 715a for emitting a pattern, and the lens cut 715a reflects light emitted from the LED 717c to the front side (player side).

  The half mirror member 716 is disposed behind the transparent members 713, 714, and 715. When all of the LEDs 717a, 717b, and 717c are not emitting light, the half mirror member 716 is transparent when viewed from the player side. The rear side of the half mirror member 716 is visible from the player side, and when at least one of the LED 717a, LED 717b, and LED 717c emits light, the half mirror member 716 is in a mirror state when viewed from the player side. Thus, the rear side of the half mirror member 716 becomes invisible from the player side. That is, when all of the LED 717a, LED 717b, and LED 717c are not emitting light, the player can visually recognize the blade member 711b behind the half mirror member 716, and at least one of the LED 717a, LED 717b, and LED 717c emits light. The player cannot visually recognize the blade accessory 711b behind the half mirror member 716.

  The LED substrate 717 is mounted with LEDs 717a, 717b, and 717c corresponding to the transparent members 713, 714, and 715, respectively, and by selecting and controlling the LED that emits light, which pattern of the transparent members 713, 714, and 715 is selected. You can select whether to emit light and perform various effects.

  FIG. 56 is a front view for explaining the configuration of the half mirror accessory 710b and the blade accessory 711b shown in FIG. 50, where (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the LED 717a, LED 717b, and LED 717c are caused to emit light. (B), (c), and (d) are figures which show a mode that the blade | wing accessory 711b is driven in the state which is not light-emitting LED717a, LED717b, and LED717c. Since the half mirror combination 710a and the blade combination 711a have the same configuration as the half mirror combination 710b and the blade combination 711b, the configuration of the half mirror combination 710b and the blade combination 711b will be described here representatively. .

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the state where the LED 717a, LED 717b and LED 717c emit light, the pattern is emitted by the lens cuts 713a, 714a and 715a of the transparent members 713, 714 and 715, and the half mirror member 716 is It will be in a mirror state, and the wing combination 711b behind the half mirror combination 710b is not visible from the player side.

  In the state shown in FIG. 56 (b), the LED 717a, LED 717b, and LED 717c are not caused to emit light, so that the half mirror member 716 becomes transparent, and the blade accessory 711b behind the half mirror accessory 710b is visually recognized from the player side. It becomes possible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 56C, the blade accessory 711b behind the half mirror accessory 710b is driven in a state where the LED 717a, LED 717b, and LED 717c are not emitting light. The blade accessory 711b can be rotated about the drive shaft 718 and is driven by a motor (not shown). At this time, the LED 717a, LED 717b, and LED 717c may emit light, and the light emission effect of the pattern of the transparent members 713, 714, and 715 may be performed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 56 (d), the blade accessory 711b behind the half mirror accessory 710b is driven while the LEDs 717a, 717b, and LED 717c are not emitting light. The blade accessory 711b can further rotate around the drive shaft 719 of the blade 711ba from the state of FIG. 56 (c), and is driven by a motor (not shown). At this time, the LED 717a, LED 717b, and LED 717c may emit light, and the light emission effect of the pattern of the transparent members 713, 714, and 715 may be performed.

  57 is an exploded perspective view of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG.

  The shielding device 246 includes left doors 246a and 246b and right doors 246c and 246d, and is disposed on the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. Above the left door 246a and the right door 246c, there is a moving mechanism 246e capable of moving the left door 246a and the right door 246c in the left-right direction.

  Each of the left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d has a transmission part as will be described in detail later.

  58 is a front view showing an example of a shielding device 246 different from that in FIG. 57, and FIGS. 58 (a), (b), and (c) are diagrams showing how the door of the shielding device 246 moves.

  The shielding device 246 is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and includes a left door 246f and a right door 246g. The left door 246f and the right door 246g can be moved in the left-right direction by a moving mechanism such as a motor (not shown).

  The left door 246f has a transmission part 246fa, and a pattern 246faa is formed on the transmission part 246fa by lens cutting. The left door 246f has LEDs 720a, 720b and 720c on the left side, and the pattern 246faa emits light by causing the LEDs 720a, 720b and 720c to emit light.

  The right door 246g has a transmission part 246ga, and a pattern 246gaa is formed on the transmission part 246ga by lens cutting. The right door 246g has LEDs 721a, 721b and 721c on the right side, and the pattern 246gaa emits light by causing the LEDs 721a, 721b and 721c to emit light.

  In this embodiment, since the left door 246f and the right door 246g are provided with LEDs as light sources, as shown in FIGS. 58B and 58C, the left door 246f and the right door 246g which are movable bodies are provided. Even when the lens moves in the left-right direction, the positional relationship between the light source and the transmissive portion does not change, and a light emission effect can be performed stably and reliably.

  59 is a schematic view showing the structure of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 57, (a) is a plan view, (b) is a front view showing a state in which the left and right LEDs emit light, and (c). Is a front view of a state in which the upper and lower LEDs emit light, and (d) is a front view of a state in which the left and right and upper and lower LEDs are emitted.

  The left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d are arranged inside the frame portion 246A. In this embodiment, the left door 246a is fixed to the left end, and the right door 246c is fixed to the right end. Although the left door 246b and the right door 246d are movable in the left-right direction, all the doors may be movable in the left-right direction, or only any door may be movable.

  The LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d, which are light sources, are provided on the frame 246A, and the LEDs 722a, 722b, and 722c are provided on the frame 246A. LEDs 723a, 723b and 723c are provided on the right side of the frame portion 246A, LEDs 724a, 724b, 724c and 724d are provided on the upper side of the frame portion 246A, and LEDs 725a, 725b, 725c and 725d are provided on the frame. It is provided on the lower side of the portion 246A.

  The left door 246b has a transmission part 246ba, and patterns 246baa and 246ba are formed on the transmission part 246ba by lens cutting. The right door 246d has a transmission part 246da, and patterns 246daa and 246dab are formed on the transmission part 246da by lens cutting.

  The pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d are formed by a lens cut that reflects and emits light from the left and right directions, and causes the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, and 723c to emit light. Then, a light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 59B).

  The pattern 246 bb on the left door 246 b and the pattern 246 db on the right door 246 d are formed by lens cutting that reflects and emits light from the up and down direction. The LEDs 724 a, 724 b, 724 c, 724 d, 725 a, 725 b, 725 c and 725 d are formed. By emitting light, a light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 59C).

  When only the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, and 723c are caused to emit light, the pattern 246bab of the left door 246b and the pattern 246db of the right door 246d do not emit light (see FIG. 59B), and the LEDs 724a, 724b, When only 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d are caused to emit light, the pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d do not emit light (see FIG. 59C).

  When all of the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d are illuminated, the pattern 246bab of the left door 246b, the pattern 246dab of the right door 246d, and the left door All of the pattern 246baa of 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d emit light, and the family crest of the trefoil appears in a circle (see FIG. 59 (d)).

  FIG. 60 is a schematic view showing the structure of the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 57, (a) is a front view showing a pattern applied to each door by lens cutting, and (b) is a plan view. (C) is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED as a light source provided in the frame part, (d) is a front view of the state which light-emitted the upper and lower LED provided in the edge, (e) is right and left It is a front view of the state which light-emitted LED of LED and center LED.

  The left doors 246a and 246b and the right doors 246c and 246d are arranged inside the frame portion 246A. In this embodiment, the left door 246a is fixed to the left end, and the right door 246c is fixed to the right end. Although the left door 246b and the right door 246d are movable in the left-right direction, all the doors may be movable in the left-right direction, or only any door may be movable.

  LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c, 724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, 725d, 726a, 726b, 726c, 726d, 727a, 727b, 727c, 727d, 728a , 728c, 728d, 729a, 729b, 729c and 729d are provided on the frame 246A, LEDs 722a, 722b and 722c are provided on the left side of the frame 246A, and LEDs 723a, 723b and 723c are on the right side of the frame 246A. LED 724a, 724b, 724c and 724d are provided near the center of the upper part of the frame part 246A, and LEDs 725a, 725b, 725c and 725d are attached to the center of the lower part of the frame part 246A. LEDs 726a and 726b are provided on the upper part of the left door 246a near the left side of the upper part of the frame part 246A, and LEDs 726c and 726d are provided on the upper part of the left door 246b near the left side of the upper part of the frame part 246A. The LEDs 727a and 727b are provided on the upper part of the right door 246c near the right side of the upper part of the frame part 246A, the LEDs 727c and 727d are provided on the upper part of the right door 246d near the right side of the upper part of the frame part 246A, and the LEDs 728a and 728b are provided. Near the left side of the lower part of the frame part 246A, it is provided at the lower part of the left door 246a, LEDs 728c and 728d are provided near the left side of the lower part of the frame part 246A, and below the left door 246b, and the LEDs 729a and 729b are provided at the frame part. The LED 7 is provided near the right side of the lower side of the 246A and below the right door 246c. 9c and 729d are provided on the bottom of the right door 246d near the right side of the lower portion of the frame portion 246A.

  The left door 246a has a transmission part 246aa, and a pattern 246aaa is formed on the transmission part 246aa by lens cutting. The right door 246c has a transmission part 246ca, and a pattern 246caa is formed on the transmission part 246ca by lens cutting.

  The pattern 246aaa of the left door 246a is formed by a lens cut that reflects and emits light from the up and down direction, and emits light by causing the LEDs 726a, 726b, 728a, and 728b to emit light (FIG. 60D). reference). The pattern 246caa of the right door 246c is formed by a lens cut that reflects and emits light from the up and down direction, and emits light by causing the LEDs 727a, 727b, 729a, and 729b to emit light (FIG. 60D). reference).

  The left door 246b has a transmission part 246ba, and patterns 246baa, 246ba and 246bac are formed on the transmission part 246ba by lens cutting. The right door 246d has a transmission part 246da, and patterns 246daa, 246dab, and 246dac are formed by lens cutting on the transmission part 246da.

  The pattern 246baa of the left door 246b and the pattern 246daa of the right door 246d are formed by a lens cut that reflects and emits light from the left and right directions, and causes the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, and 723c to emit light. Then, a light emission effect is performed (see FIG. 59B).

  The patterns 246 bab and bac of the left door 246 b and the patterns 246 dab and 246 dac of the right door 246 d are formed by lens cutting that reflects and emits light from the vertical direction, and LEDs 724 a, 724 b, 724 c, 724 d, 725 a, 725 b, 725c, 725d, 726c, 726d, 727c, 727d, 728c, 728d, 729c, and 729d emit light to produce a light-emitting effect (see FIGS. 59C and 60D).

  As shown in FIG. 60D, the left door 246b and the right door 246d are moved inward, the pattern 246bac of the left door 246b is below the LEDs 726c and 726d, and the pattern 246dac of the right door 246d is below the LEDs 727c and 727d. In this state, the LEDs 726a, 726b, 726c, 726d, 727a, 727b, 727c, 727d, 728a, 728b, 728c, 728d, 729a, 729b, 729c, and 729d are caused to emit light, so that the transmitting portions 246aa and 246ba The light emission effect of the patterns 246aa and 246bac can be performed in the overlapping portion, and the light emission effect of the patterns 246caa and 246dac can be performed in the portion where the transmission portions 246ca and 246ca overlap. Further, at this time, the patterns 246 bab and 246 dab may receive light weakly from the top and bottom oblique directions and may emit light or may not emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (d), the left door 246b and the right door 246d are moved inward to make a match, and the LEDs 722a, 722b, 722c, 723a, 723b, 723c724a, 724b, 724c, 724d, 725a, 725b, 725c, and 725d. When the light is emitted, the left door 246b pattern 246bab, the right door 246d pattern 246dab, the left door 246b pattern 246baa and the right door 246d pattern 246daa emit light, and the trefoil family crest appears in a circle (FIG. 60 ( e)).

  FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration in which a plurality of transmission portions are stacked to perform a light emission effect, and FIG. 61 (a) is a front view of a state in which the plurality of transmission portions are laid flat without overlapping, ) Is a perspective view showing a state in which a plurality of transmissive portions are stacked, (c) is a perspective view showing a plurality of transmissive portions being stacked, and an interval is widened, and (d) is a light emitting effect by stacking a plurality of transmissive portions. It is a perspective view which shows the pattern to do.

  In this embodiment, flat transparent portions 246ha, 256ia, and 246ja are provided, and the transparent portion 246ha is provided with a pattern 246haa by a lens cut that emits and displays the character's head (Yoshimune), and the transparent portion 246ia has a character. A pattern 246iaa by a lens cut for displaying the upper body of the character is applied, and a pattern 246jaa by a lens cut for displaying the lower body of the character by a light emission is applied to the transmission part 246ja.

  By stacking the transmissive portions 246ha, 256ia, and 246ja to produce a light emission effect, for example, it is possible to perform a light emission effect with a stereoscopic effect such that the upper part of the character is in front and the lower part is on the back side.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200 showing an embodiment in which a plurality of transmission parts are stacked to produce a light emission effect.

  The same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The transmissive member 703 of the transmissive part 700 is provided with a pattern 703e by a lens cut that emits and displays the face of the character (Yoshimune). In addition, a pattern 246kaa is applied to the transmission part 246ka of the shielding device 246 by a lens cut that emits and displays a family crest (trefoil in a circle), and a pattern by a lens cut that displays a family crest (a trefoil in a circle) to the transmission part 246la. 246 laa is given.

  In the game board 200, the transmission member 703 of the transmission unit 700 is disposed so as to overlap the front surface of the transmission unit 246ka and the transmission unit 246la of the shielding device 246.

  A plurality of transmissive portions are arranged in a superimposed manner, in addition to the case where one device has a plurality of transmissive portions such as half mirror actors 710a and 710b, and the plurality of transmissive portions are arranged in a superimposed manner. In some cases, a plurality of transmission units provided in each of a plurality of different devices such as the transmission unit 700 and the shielding device 246 are arranged to overlap each other.

  FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200 showing an embodiment in which a plurality of transmission parts are stacked to produce a light emission effect.

  The same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The transmissive member 703 is provided with a lens cut pattern 703f for emitting and displaying a heart mark. In the present embodiment, in a state where the blade 711ba of the blade accessory 711b which is a movable body is moved, the state overlaps the pattern 703f.

  In addition, the structure which concerns on all the light emission effects mentioned above is applicable suitably in the specific example of the effect demonstrated below.

  FIGS. 64A to 64G are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  FIGS. 65A to 65C are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 64A to 64G. .

  The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, and a right symbol display area 208c. In the upper right part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 reserve number notification area 730a for displaying the number of special figure 1 variable games that are on hold, and the number of special figure 2 variable games that are on hold are displayed. The reserved number notification area 730b for special figure 2 is provided. In the lower right part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol region 731a for special figure 1 and a fourth symbol region 731b for special symbol 2 are provided. A frame portion 733 is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the left side of the frame portion 733, icons are displayed on the left side of the frame portion 733 as many icons as the number of the special figure 1 variable games held. 732a is provided, and on the right side of the frame portion 733, a special icon 2 hold icon display area 732b for displaying icons corresponding to the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is provided.

  In the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1, the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is displayed in alphabets corresponding to special figures A to J shown in FIG. Further, in the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2, the result of the previous special figure 2 variable game is displayed in alphabets corresponding to special figures A to J shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 64 (a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ), And the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game is three.

  In FIG. 64 (b) following FIG. 64 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is deleted, and the other icons are sequentially shifted to the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, the hold number is subtracted by 1 and 2 is displayed.

  After FIG. 64 (b), in FIG. 64 (c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol display area 208a, the right symbol display area 208c, and the middle symbol display area 208b. J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as a result that the result is special figure J.

  Following FIG. 64 (c), in FIG. 64 (d), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is deleted, and the other icons are sequentially shifted to the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, 1 is displayed by subtracting 1 from the hold number.

  In FIG. 64 (e) following FIG. 64 (d), a character (panda) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as a reach notice.

  Following FIG. 64E, in FIG. 64F, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and reach is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. And a decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner.

  Following FIG. 64 (f), in FIG. 64 (g), a pattern 703 e formed on the transparent member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703e may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At this time, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c overlap the pattern 703e. The special figure 1 reserved number notification area 730a and the special figure 2 reserved number notification area 730b do not overlap the pattern 703e. The fourth symbol region 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol region 731b for special figure 2 do not overlap the pattern 703e. The frame portion 733, the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 732b overlap the pattern 703e. Special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a and special figure 2 hold number notification area 730b, special figure 1 hold icon display area 732a and special figure 2 hold icon display area 732b are areas for displaying the same type of information. It is. Of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an area overlapping the pattern 703e may be more noticeable than an overlapping area, and may be less noticeable than an overlapping area.

  Following FIG. 64 (g), in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b), effects are performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a partial area (for example, the upper portion) of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  65 (b), in FIG. 65 (c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is displayed. J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as a special figure J.

  66 (a) to 66 (e) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  In FIG. 66 (a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ), And the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game is three.

  In FIG. 66 (b) following FIG. 66 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is deleted, and the other icons are sequentially shifted to the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, the hold number is subtracted by 1 and 2 is displayed.

  66 (b), in FIG. 66 (c), decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and right symbol display area 208c, and reach! Is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. And a decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 66 (d) following FIG. 66 (c), the left door 246 b and the right door 246 d of the shielding device 246 are moved in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and applied to the transmission part 246 ba and the transmission part 246 da. The patterns 246baa and 246daa are displayed by light emission. The left door 246b has an opaque frame portion 246bb, and the right door 246d has an opaque frame portion 246db.

  At this time, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c overlap the patterns 246baa and 246daa. For this reason, some decorative symbols may be difficult to visually recognize. The reserved figure notification area 730a for special figure 1 and the reserved number notification area 730b for special figure 2 do not overlap the pattern 703e, but overlap the opaque frame portion 246db. For this reason, there are cases where the reserved figure notification area 730a for special figure 1 and the reserved number notification area 730b for special figure 2 are partially invisible. The fourth symbol region 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol region 731b for special figure 2 do not overlap the pattern 703e, but overlap the opaque frame portion 246db. For this reason, the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 may be partially invisible. Due to the presence of the partially difficult-to-view region and the partially-invisible region, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the decorative design displayed in the partially difficult-to-view region.

  66D, in FIG. 66E, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is displayed. J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as a special figure J.

  67 (a) to 67 (h) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ), And the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game is two.

  In FIG. 67 (b) following FIG. 67 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is deleted, and the other icons are sequentially shifted to the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, 1 is displayed by subtracting 1 from the hold number.

  After FIG. 67 (b), FIG. 67 (c) shows a state in which there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the special figure 1 variable game hold is increased by one. In the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, an icon for the hold added this time is added and displayed on the outermost side. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, 1 is added to the hold number and 2 is displayed.

  After FIG. 67 (c), in FIG. 67 (d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is displayed. J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as a special figure J.

  In FIG. 67 (e) following FIG. 67 (d), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is deleted, and the other icons are sequentially shifted to the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, 1 is displayed by subtracting 1 from the hold number.

  In FIG. 67 (f) following FIG. 67 (e), a pattern 703 g formed on the transparent member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703g may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At this time, the pattern 703g may make the icon displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a stand out. For example, the pattern 703g may be a light-emitting display surrounding the icon. is there.

  Following FIG. 67 (f), in FIG. 67 (g), the icon displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a changes from a normal circle to a character (panda). The shape of the icon may be changed according to the lottery result of the prefetch lottery process described above.

  After FIG. 67 (g), in FIG. 67 (h), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is displayed. J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as a special figure J.

  68 (a) to 68 (h) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  69 (a) to 69 (g) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (h). .

  68 (a), the special symbol 1 variable game is started, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 68 (b) following FIG. 68 (a), a character (panda) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as a reach notice.

  68 (b), in FIG. 68 (c), the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c stop displaying the decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b has a reach! And a decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 66 (d) following FIG. 68 (c), the pattern 703e applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703e may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At this time, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c overlap the pattern 703e. The special figure 1 reserved number notification area 730a and the special figure 2 reserved number notification area 730b do not overlap the pattern 703e. The fourth symbol region 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol region 731b for special figure 2 do not overlap the pattern 703e. The frame portion 733, the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 732b overlap the pattern 703e. Of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an area overlapping the pattern 703e may be more noticeable than an overlapping area, and may be less noticeable than an overlapping area. In FIG. 68 (d), since the number of hold of special figure variable game is 0, there is no icon display in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 732b. The pattern 703e does not overlap, and the pattern 703e does not hide the icon.

  68 (d), 68 (f), and 68 (g), effects are performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a partial area (for example, the upper portion) of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 68 (h) following FIG. 68 (g), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the pattern 703h applied to the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). Is displayed. The pattern 703h may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At this time, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c overlap the pattern 703h. The special figure 1 reserved number notification area 730a and the special figure 2 reserved number notification area 730b do not overlap the pattern 703e. The fourth symbol region 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol region 731b for special figure 2 overlap the pattern 703e. The frame portion 733, the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 732b do not overlap the pattern 703e.

  In FIG. 69 (a) following FIG. 68 (h), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. A is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as a special figure A.

  In FIG. 69 (b) following FIG. 69 (a), a big hit effect is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  Following FIG. 69 (b), in FIG. 69 (c), a big hit effect is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. As an effect at this time, it is advantageous for the player to hit the game ball so as to go to the right side of the game area 124 during the big hit (it is easy to win the variable winning opening 234). May be done.

  Following FIG. 69 (c), in FIG. 69 (d), a big hit effect is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. As an effect at this time, there is a case where an effect suggesting what kind of effect will be developed will be advantageous to the player. FIG. 69 (d) shows a state where there are two winnings for the second special figure starting port 232 and two special figure 2 variable games are held. In the special icon 2 hold icon display area 732b, two icons about the added hold are added and displayed. In the special figure 2 hold number notification area 730b, the hold number is incremented by 2 and 2 is displayed.

  In FIG. 69 (e) following FIG. 69 (d), the left door 246b and the right door 246d of the shielding device 246 are moved in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transmission portions 246aa, 246ba, 246ca and the transmission portion are moved. Patterns 246aa, 246bac, 246caa and 246dac applied to 246da are displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  In FIG. 69 (f) following FIG. 69 (e), the left door 246 b and the right door 246 d are moved and closed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pattern 246 baa applied to the transmission part 246 ba and the transmission part 246 da. 246 bab, 246 daa and 246 dab are displayed in a light-emitting manner. In addition, a pattern 703e applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The display content of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed as appropriate, nothing may be displayed, or any information may not be displayed.

  After FIG. 69 (f), in FIG. 69 (g), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c have an effect that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state. .

  70 (a) to 70 (h) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  71 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order from the decorative symbol display device 208, following FIGS. 70 (a) to (h). .

  72 (a) to 72 (h) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (h). .

  FIG. 70 (a) shows a case where the result of the special figure 1 variable game this time is the special figure A and there are two variable game suspensions of the special figure 2 in FIG. In addition, it is displayed that a high probability state (special figure high probability state normal figure high probability state) has been reached.

  In FIG. 70 (b) following FIG. 70 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the left symbol display area while displaying that the current state is a high probability state (special drawing high probability state common figure high probability state). The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  Following FIG. 70 (b), in FIG. 70 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 was put on hold while displaying the current high probability state (special figure high probability state ordinary figure high probability state). Special figure 2 variable game is started, decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the special icon 2 hold icon display area 732b, it is displayed closest to the center. Erase the icon that has been displayed, and display the other icons in the center. In the special figure 2 hold number notification area 730b, the hold number is subtracted by 1 and 1 is displayed.

  Following FIG. 70C, FIG. 70D shows a state in which there are three winnings for the second special figure starting port 232 and three special figure 2 variable games are held. In the special icon 2 hold icon display area 732b, three icons about the hold added this time are added and displayed on the outermost side. In the special figure 2 reserved number notification area 730b, 3 is added to the number of held and 4 is displayed. At this time, for the second icon from the left, a character (panda) is displayed according to the lottery result of the prefetch lottery process.

  In FIG. 70 (e) following FIG. 70 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the left symbol display area while displaying that it is currently in a high probability state (special drawing high probability state ordinary figure high probability state). The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 70 (f) following FIG. 70 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 was put on hold while displaying that it is currently in a high probability state (special figure high probability state ordinary figure high probability state). Special figure 2 variable game is started, decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the special icon 2 hold icon display area 732b, it is displayed closest to the center. Erase the icon that has been displayed, and display the other icons in the center. In the special figure 2 reservation number notification area 730b, the reservation number is subtracted by 1 and 3 is displayed.

  Following FIG. 70 (f), in FIG. 70 (g), a pattern 703i applied to the transparent member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703i may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  At this time, the pattern 703i may make the icon displayed in the special icon 2 hold icon display area 732b stand out. For example, the pattern 703i may be light-emitting around the icon. is there.

  Following FIG. 70 (g), in FIG. 70 (h), the icon displayed in the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 732b changes from a character (panda) to another character (number length). The shape of the icon may be changed according to the lottery result of the prefetch lottery process described above.

  After FIG. 70 (h), in FIG. 71 (a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is displayed. J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as a special figure J.

  In FIG. 71 (b) following FIG. 71 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 was on hold while displaying the current high probability state (special figure high probability state ordinary figure high probability state). Special figure 2 variable game is started, decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the special icon 2 hold icon display area 732b, it is displayed closest to the center Erase the icon that has been displayed, and display the other icons in the center. In the special figure 2 hold number notification area 730b, the hold number is subtracted by 1 and 2 is displayed. The special figure 2 variable game started here is a variable game displayed with the reserved icon of the character (bancho), and the subsequent effects are effects according to the reserved icon of the character (bancho). Here, an effect of displaying the decorative symbol display device 208 in four parts is performed.

  In FIG. 71 (c) following FIG. 71 (b), the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display areas 208 e, 208 f, 208 g and 208 h obtained by dividing the decorative symbol display device 208 into four parts.

  Following FIG. 71C, in FIG. 71D, reach is displayed in the display area 208e.

  In FIG. 71 (e) following FIG. 71 (d), a pattern 703 j formed on the transparent member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703j may be conspicuous in the display area 208e performing reach display. For example, the pattern 703j may be light-emitting around the display area 208e. In FIG. 71 (e), the display is stopped in the display area 208g, but the display area 208g is not reach display, so that the display area 208e is not displayed in a light-emitting pattern. The same applies to FIG. 71 (f).

  In FIG. 71 (g) following FIG. 71 (f), the display area 208f is stopped, but the display area 208f is not reach display. Not.

  Following FIG. 71 (g), in FIG. 71 (h), reach is displayed in the display area 208h.

  Following FIG. 71 (h), in FIG. 72 (a), a pattern 703k applied to the transparent member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703k may make the display area 208h performing reach display stand out. For example, the pattern 703k may surround and display the display area 208h.

  In FIG. 72 (b) following FIG. 72 (a), the light emission display of the patterns 703j and 703k applied to the transparent member 703 is stopped in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side), and the pattern 703l is emitted. indicate. The pattern 703l may be inconspicuous except for the display areas 208e and 208h displaying reach. For example, the pattern 703l may hide the areas other than the display areas 208e and 208h (for example, the display areas 208f and 208g). In some cases, the display is light-emitting.

  72 (b), in FIG. 72 (c), the four-segment display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is terminated, and the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed in a variable manner as reach display.

  Following FIG. 72 (c), in FIG. 72 (d), a pattern 703e applied to the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703e may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Following FIG. 72D, in FIGS. 72E, 72F, and 72G, effects are performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  Following FIG. 72 (g), in FIG. 72 (h), decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is displayed. A is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 as a special figure A.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a design and a pattern in the case where a liquid crystal display device 208i different from the decorative design display device 208 is provided and the liquid crystal display device 208i performs a normal-game variation effect of a normal-game variable game. , (A) shows an example of a stop pattern mode of a general map that is stopped and displayed by the general map display device 210 according to the result of the general map variable game, and (b) according to the result of the general map variable game. FIG. 6 shows an example of a general-purpose decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 208i, and (c) shows a correspondence between the general-purpose decorative pattern of (a) and the general-purpose decorative pattern of (b). It is a figure which shows the electric chew release pattern when the lottery result of a game becomes each, (d) is a figure which shows the pattern of the usual figure change effect displayed variably on the liquid crystal display device 208i.

  In this embodiment, there are three types of stoppage display modes: “general symbol A” that is a winning symbol 1, “general symbol B” that is a winning symbol 2, and “general symbol C” that is an off symbol. is there. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when the normal map variable time has passed and the winning of the general map variable game is notified, the general map display device 210 stops displaying “general map A” and “general map B”, and the normal map variable game is disconnected. Is displayed, the general map display device 210 stops and displays “general map C”. The normal fluctuation time is 2000 ms when the probability is low, and 1000 ms when the probability is high. Within this normal time change time, the normal time change effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 208i (see FIG. 74). The normal map change effect may be performed at any timing within the normal map change time. The usual figure variation effect may be performed by the frame portion 733 of the decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that the normal map change effect may be a timing at which the result derived and the result of the determination of whether or not the general map or special map is appropriate do not contradict each other.

  As shown in (1) of FIG. 73 (d), as pattern 1, an effect of repeating the display of “common figure decoration 1”, “common figure decoration 2”, and “common figure decoration 3” for 3 seconds is performed.

  As shown in (2) of FIG. 73 (d), as the pattern 2, an effect of repeating the display of “general decoration 1”, “general decoration 2”, and “general decoration 3” for 15 seconds is performed.

  As shown in (3) of FIG. 73 (d), as pattern 3, the effect of repeating the display of “general decoration 2” for 10 seconds is performed.

  As shown in (4) of FIG. 73 (d), as pattern 4, the display of “general decoration 1”, “general decoration 2”, “general decoration 3”, and “super hot!” Is displayed for 10 seconds. Perform repetitive effects. “Gekiatsu!” May be a symbol instead of a letter.

  As shown in (5) of FIG. 73 (d), as the pattern 5, the effect of repeating the display of “common figure decoration 2” and “gekiatsu!” For 10 seconds is performed. “Gekiatsu!” May be a symbol instead of a letter.

  As shown in (6) of FIG. 73 (d), as pattern 6, an effect of repeating the display of “latency?”, “Probability”, and “big hit” for 5 seconds is performed. “Hidden?”, “Accuracy”, and “Big hit” may be symbols instead of letters.

  As shown in (7) of FIG. 73 (d), as the pattern 7, an effect of displaying “character (Yoshimune) symbol” for 1 second is performed. This production may be performed suddenly, or may be won in the usual figure B.

  As shown in (8) of FIG. 73 (d), as the pattern 8, an effect is displayed in which any one of “Hidden?”, “Accuracy”, “Super hot!”, And “Big hit” is displayed for 8 seconds. “Hidden?”, “Accuracy”, “Super Hot!”, And “Big Hit” may be symbols instead of letters.

  74 (a) to 74 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects produced by the display on the liquid crystal display device 208i, the display on the decorative design display device 208, and the light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example of the effect produced by the display on the liquid crystal display device 208i, the display on the decorative design display device 208, and the light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion, following FIGS. 74 (a) to (h).

  In FIG. 74A, the liquid crystal display device 208i displays a logo or the like. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a case where the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is the special figure J and there is one variable game hold of the special figure 1.

  In FIG. 74 (b) following FIG. 74 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is deleted. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, 1 is subtracted from the hold number and 0 is displayed. Further, the usual figure change game is started, and the liquid crystal display device 208i starts the usual figure change effect of the pattern shown in FIG. 73 (d). At this time, the pattern 703m formed on the transmission member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the liquid crystal display device 208i (player side). The pattern 703m may be larger or smaller than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208i. Further, the frame portion 733 of the decorative symbol display device 208 performs display corresponding to the display of the liquid crystal display device 208i.

  Following FIG. 74 (b), in FIG. 74 (c), the liquid crystal display device 208i performs the usual change effect of the pattern shown in FIG. 73 (d).

  In FIG. 74 (d) following FIG. 74 (c), the liquid crystal display device 208 i stops and displays the general-purpose decorative symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the general-purpose variable game. Here, the general decoration 2 shown in FIG. 73B is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 74 (e) following FIG. 74 (d), the liquid crystal display device 208i moves down to reach the front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol. The display area 208c is arranged to be hidden. At this time, the pattern 703n formed on the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the liquid crystal display device 208i (player side). The pattern 703n may be larger or smaller than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208i. The pattern 703n may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 74 (f) following FIG. 74 (e), the liquid crystal display device 208 i moves upward to make the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 visible. In the liquid crystal display device 208i, “electric chew open” is displayed, and in the frame portion 733 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character (Yoshimune) is displayed correspondingly. At this time, the pattern 703o applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703o may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  74 (f), in FIG. 75, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of this special figure 1 variable game is shown as a special figure. J is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 as being J.

  76 (a) to 76 (e) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  FIG. 76A shows a case where the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is special figure J and there is one variable game hold of special figure 1 in FIG.

  In FIG. 76 (b) following FIG. 76 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is deleted. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, 1 is subtracted from the hold number and 0 is displayed. At this time, the frame part 733 functions as a variable icon display area, and the hold icon displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 732a and digested in the current special figure 1 variable game moves to the frame part 733. It is displayed as a variation icon (character (panda) in FIG. 76B). The variation icon displayed in the frame part 733 is used as a notice effect of the current symbol variation display.

  Following FIG. 76 (b), in FIG. 76 (c), for example, a character (haniwa) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b to perform a notice effect.

  Following FIG. 76 (c), in FIG. 76 (d), for example, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the character (haniwa) is changed and displayed as the character (panda) to perform the notice effect. This notice is also used as a notice effect for the current symbol variation display. At this time, the pattern 703p applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703p may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pattern 703p may be displayed so as to hide the frame portion 733.

  Following FIG. 76 (d), in FIG. 76 (e), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the medium symbol display area 208b is reached! And a decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1.

  77 (a) to 77 (d) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  FIG. 77 (a) shows a case where the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is special figure J, and there is one variable game hold of special figure 1 in FIG.

  In FIG. 77 (b) following FIG. 77 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is deleted. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, 1 is subtracted from the hold number and 0 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 makes a step-up notice. The step-up notice is a notice that the reliability of the jackpot increases as the steps are repeated. In FIG. 77 (b), step-up notice 208aa of step 1 is performed.

  Subsequent to FIG. 77 (b), in FIG. 76 (c), a step-up notice 208ba of step 2 is performed. At this time, the patterns 703q and 703r applied to the transmitting member 703 are displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side). The patterns 703q and 703r may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pattern 703q is lit and displayed so as to hide the step-up notice 208aa of step 1. At this time, an important part of identification may be hidden by concealing the number of steps of the step-up notice 208aa (1 in FIG. 76C). The pattern 703r is lit and displayed so as to surround the step-up notice 208ba of step 2. The step-up notice 208aa in step 1 and the step-up notice 208ba in step 2 are notices of the same system.

  77 (c), in FIG. 77 (d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the middle symbol display area 208b is reached! And a decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is displayed in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 and the pattern 703e to be lit and displayed on the transmissive member 703.

  In the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed according to the lottery result. The display of the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 is a display according to the same type of information.

  The pattern 703e may hide the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and may not hide the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214.

  The pattern 703e may not hide the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and may hide the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214.

  The pattern 703e may hide the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and may hide the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214.

  The pattern 703e may not hide the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and may not hide the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214.

  79 (a) to 79 (c) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  FIG. 79 (a) shows a case where the result of the previous special figure 1 variable game is special figure J and there are two pending variable games of special figure 1 in FIG. In the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the first hold is indicated by a normal icon, and the second hold is indicated by a character (panda) icon.

  In FIG. 79 (b) following FIG. 79 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed closest to the center is deleted, and the other icons are sequentially shifted to the center and displayed. In the special figure 1 hold number notification area 730a, 1 is displayed by subtracting 1 from the hold number.

  Following FIG. 79 (b), in FIG. 79 (c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed as special figure J in the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1. At this time, the pattern 703e applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703e may be larger or smaller than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, there are many cases where the light emission display by the transmissive part is performed when the fluctuation is stopped.

<Third embodiment>
Hereinafter, a gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside of the front frame door 106 can be opened. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) (not shown) by the operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation Are operated by the player, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 82) by the player's operation, and the player's operation. An operation button 136a, a chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) (not shown) installed in the amusement store, and a card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the player's balance and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the player's balance and card unit status are provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 81 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 80 viewed from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is positioned below the ball tank 150, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a sphere falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the sphere tank 150 to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The tank rail 154 is also referred to as a twin rail, and is disposed so that, for example, at least a part of the first sub-board 160 overlaps in the front-rear direction. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a tank rail 154 that may give noise to the control board is arranged to overlap the first sub board 160 in order to save the arrangement area of the members. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not affected by the noise of the first sub-board 160 even if the tank rail 154 and the first sub-board 160 are overlapped when the tank rail 154 has noise countermeasures. There are cases where it can be reduced. Since the tank rail 154 is provided with noise countermeasures, the side surface of the tank rail 154 can be formed of an insulating transparent member. Thereby, when the tank rail 154 is installed in the pachinko machine 100, the flow of the game ball on the tank rail 154 is visually confirmed through the side surface of the tank rail 154 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. There are cases where you can.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 from a payout passage 121 (see FIG. 80) disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 pays out a ball to the player with this configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing. The CR interface unit 186 includes a CR unit connection unit 186a configured with, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector. The CR interface unit 186 transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit via the CR unit connection unit 186a.

  For example, a volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 is provided on the upper left in the drawing of the first sub board case 162 that houses the first sub board 160. The volume adjustment switch 192 is constituted by a rotary switch, for example.

  The pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the back side. The relay board 196 is used for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when the gaming board 200 is exchanged, the gaming board 200 is exchanged while the main body 104 and the hall computer are connected via the relay board 196. The However, depending on the model, it is necessary to change the type of signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer. You may be comprised so that the connection condition of can be grasped | ascertained.

  Similarly, it is preferable that the main body 104 be provided with another configuration (for example, a power cord (not shown)) that needs to be connected to the outside.

  The pachinko machine 100 has a power connector 191 on the right side of the relay board 196 when viewed from the back side. A power cord (not shown) is connected to the power connector 191.

  When changing the model of the pachinko machine 100, the game board 200 is replaced. At this time, the main board 156, the first sub board 160, and the second sub control unit 500 may also be replaced. The board 156, the first sub board 160, and the second sub control unit 500 may be provided in the game board 200.

  Further, even when the model of the pachinko machine 100 is changed, the main body 104 may be used as it is without being replaced. At this time, the payout board 170, the launch board 174, and the power supply board 182 also need to be replaced. In some cases, the payout substrate 170, the launch substrate 174, and the power supply substrate 182 may be provided on the main body 104.

  FIG. 82 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 (liquid crystal display device 208) is disposed substantially at the center, and an effect movable body 224 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a display device using EL or the like may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the lower right part of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is provided as the fourth decorative symbol after the decorative symbol displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. This 4th symbol is provided with a 4th symbol 219 for the special figure 1 for the special figure 1 and a 4th symbol 221 for the special figure 2 for the special figure 2, and an effect display area 208d (for example, Display at the bottom. The 4th symbol displays change / stop, for example, black indicates a stop display and gray indicates a change display.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the rendering device 206. Has been established.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning.

  The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the usual figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a usual figure variable game by the ordinary figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right side of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a blade 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, one is provided below the center of the game board 200 and one below the right. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display devices 212 and 214 are hit by winning the special figure variable game. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times).

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

  The parts that can be contacted by the game balls such as the hitting ball direction changing member 236 and the game nails 238 are game parts that can be placed in the game area and can be contacted by the game balls that have been launched.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The rendering device 206 is driven and controlled by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball rided by the game nail 238 of the game board 200, and the like. On the stage 244 that is a rolling region, a game ball that has entered the receiving hole 244b is released from the discharge hole 244a that is a discharge unit, and the released ball is likely to enter the first special figure starting port 230. ing.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 moves up and down in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  83 is a diagram showing a thirteenth embodiment of the configuration of the transmission part according to the present invention, and is a diagram of an example of a specific configuration of the transmission part 700, (a) is a front view, (b) (A) is a figure which shows the state which light-emitted the pattern in the permeation | transmission area | region of the permeation | transmission part 700 shown to (a).

  FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a state in which light is irradiated to the transmission region illustrated in FIG.

  The transmissive part 700 irradiates light from a transmissive member 703 that functions as a direction changing means by, for example, cutting a lens at a position corresponding to the smile mark pattern of the transmissive regions 703b and 703c, and a side surface of the transmissive member 703. Light emitting means 701, an outer glass 705 provided on the player side of the transparent member 703, an inner glass 706 provided on the opposite side of the transparent member 703, an outer glass 705, the transparent member 703 and the inner glass 706. And a glass unit frame 704 to be fitted.

  The light emitting means 701 includes light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G, and 702H, which are LEDs, for example, and a connector 708 that supplies power to the light sources 702A to 702H is provided on the outer periphery of the glass unit frame 704. Exposed. When the light sources 702A to 702H are caused to emit light, the direction of the light is changed to the player side by the lens cut applied to the transmission regions 703b and 703c of the transmission member 703, and a smile mark pattern is emitted. This light source is irradiation means capable of irradiating at least light toward the transmission region.

  FIG. 85 and FIG. 86 are diagrams for explaining that the patterns to be raised are made different by causing the light sources at different positions to emit light in the configuration shown in FIG. 83 and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 85A, the smile mark pattern (for example, eyes and mouth) 703ba in the transmissive region 703b is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702A and 702E to emit light. When the light sources 702A and 702E emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the pattern 703ba may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the smile mark pattern (for example, the contour of the face) 703bb in the transmissive region 703b is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702B and 702F to emit light. When the light sources 702B and 702F are caused to emit light, other patterns may be emitted, or only the pattern 703bb may be emitted.

  In this way, among the smile mark patterns in the transmissive region 703b, for example, by partially changing the direction of the lens cut, the light source to be reflected is made different, and the light source that emits light is controlled, so that one pattern is stepped. It is possible to emit light automatically.

  Emitting the smile mark patterns 703ba and 703bb in the transmissive region 703b is realized by causing the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E, and 702F to emit light. When the light sources 702A, 702B, 702E, and 702F emit light, the other patterns may emit light, or only the patterns 703ba and 703bb may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 86A, the smile mark pattern (for example, the contour of the face) 703ca in the transmissive region 703c is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702C and 702G to emit light. When the light sources 702C and 702G emit light, other patterns may emit light, or only the pattern 703ca may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (b), the smile mark pattern (for example, eyes and mouth) 703cb in the transmissive region 703c is caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702D and 702H to emit light. When the light sources 702D and 702H are caused to emit light, other patterns may be emitted, or only the pattern 703cb may be emitted.

  In this way, among the smile mark patterns in the transmissive region 703c, for example, by partially changing the direction of the lens cut, the light source to be reflected is made different, and the light source that emits light is controlled, so that one pattern is stepped. It is possible to emit light automatically.

  The smile mark patterns 703ca and 703cb in the transmissive region 703c are caused to emit light by causing the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G, and 702H to emit light. When the light sources 702C, 702D, 702G and 702H are caused to emit light, other patterns may be emitted, or only the patterns 703ca and 703cb may be emitted.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the direction of the light source and the transmissive region in the configuration shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, wherein (a) shows the direction of the light source, and (b) shows ( It is a figure which expands and shows the location enclosed with the rectangle A in a).

  Light sources 702 </ b> A to 702 </ b> H are arranged around the side of the transmissive member 703 so as to emit light toward the center of the transmissive member 703. In each region of the transmissive member 703, the intensity of light received from the light source varies depending on the distance from the light source and the difference in orientation with respect to the light source. Here, the relationship between a region and a light source will be described for each of regions B, C, D, and E in FIG. 87B so that uniform light emission effects can be achieved in each region. The light output from each of the light sources 702A to 702H has directivity, the light that goes straight to the center in the direction facing the light source is the strongest, and the light that is weaker than the center goes straight in the oblique direction.

  The region B is irradiated with light from two upper and lower light sources (for example, the light sources 702A and 702E). In this area B, both the directions of the upper and lower light sources face each other, and strong light travels straight depending on the directivity of the light sources, but the light is attenuated because the distance from the upper and lower light sources is far. Therefore, in this region B, it is possible to secure the amount of light necessary for production by receiving light from the upper and lower light sources.

  The region C is irradiated with light from the lower one light source (for example, the light source 702E). This area C faces the direction of the lower one light source, and strong light goes straight due to the directivity of the light source, and the distance from this lower one light source is short. Therefore, in this area C, it is possible to secure the amount of light necessary for production by receiving light from the lower light source.

  The region D is close to a single light source (for example, the light source 702E), but is positioned obliquely with respect to this single light source, and receives less light than when facing directly. Therefore, in this region D, light from other nearby light sources (for example, the light source 702E) is also received, so that the amount of light necessary for production can be secured.

  The region E is close to the light source (for example, the light sources 702D and 702E), but is located in a large oblique direction with respect to the light source, and thus the light does not easily reach.

  88A and 88B are diagrams showing a lens cut that forms a pattern that emits light in the transmissive region in the configuration shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, and FIG. 88A is a diagram showing the pattern and the direction of the light source, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by a broken-line ellipse F in FIG.

  A lens cut is applied to the transmission region 703d of the transmission member 703 so that a smile mark pattern can be emitted. Referring to the enlarged view of FIG. 88 (b), lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, and 703de are applied to portions surrounded by an ellipse F. Each of the lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, and 703de has different cut angles according to the direction of light emitted from the light source. For example, the lens cut 703dc has a cut in a direction facing the light source 702F, and the lens cut 703de has a cut in a direction facing the light source 702E. The lens cut 703dd has a cut in a direction that can receive light from the light sources 702F and 702E.

  Note that, as described above, a pattern lens cut is applied to the transmission part, and the light emission display of the pattern is performed by directing light from the light source toward the player side. It may be referred to as “light emission display of applied pattern”.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front.

  The transmissive member 703 described above is provided on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pattern 703t of the transmissive area provided on the transmissive member 703 is displayed as a decorative symbol display as viewed from the player. It is provided at a position overlapping with the device 208.

  The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, and a right symbol display area 208c. In the lower right part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol region 731a for special figure 1 and a fourth symbol region 731b for special symbol 2 are provided. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided a special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a for displaying the icons for the number of special game 1 variable games that are held, and on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, A special icon 2 hold icon display area 732b for displaying icons for the number of special figure 2 variable games on hold is provided.

  The fourth symbol area 731a for the special figure 1 displays the fluctuation / stop of the special figure 1 variable game. In the figure, for example, black indicates a stop display, and gray indicates a variable display. In the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1, the stop display may be colored in a predetermined color, blinking a predetermined color, displaying a predetermined symbol, or displaying a plurality of predetermined symbols alternately. In the fourth symbol area 731a for the special figure 1, the variable display may be colored in a predetermined color, blinking a predetermined color, displaying a predetermined symbol, or alternately displaying a plurality of predetermined symbols. It only needs to be distinguishable from the display.

  The special symbol 2 fourth symbol area 731b displays the fluctuation / stop of the special figure 2 variable game. In the figure, for example, black indicates a stop display and gray indicates a variable display. In the fourth symbol area 731b for the special figure 2, the stop display may be colored in a predetermined color, blinking the predetermined color, displaying a predetermined symbol, or displaying a plurality of predetermined symbols alternately. In the fourth symbol area 731b for the special figure 2, the variable display may be colored in a predetermined color, blinking the predetermined color, displaying a predetermined symbol, or alternately displaying a plurality of predetermined symbols. It only needs to be distinguishable from the display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 89, the reserved icon display area for special figure 1 732a, the reserved icon display area for special figure 2 732b, the fourth graphic area 731a for special figure 1, and the fourth graphic area 731b for special figure 2 Although the pattern 703t does not overlap, the pattern of the light emitting display in the transmissive region provided on the transmissive member 703 may be overlapped and hidden.

  90 (a) to 90 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  91 (a) to 91 (b) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 90 (a) to (f). .

  FIG. 90 (a) shows a case where decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is four. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 90 (a), in FIG. 90 (b), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  Following FIG. 90B, in FIG. 90C, the variable display is continued.

  Following FIG. 90 (c), in FIG. 90 (d), the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a are stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 90D, in FIG. 90E, the decorative symbols in the right symbol display area 208c are stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 90 (e), in FIG. 90 (f), fluctuation fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  Subsequent to FIG. 90 (f), in FIG. 91 (a), the fluctuation variation in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is continued.

  Following FIG. 91 (a), in FIG. 91 (b), decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Will stop display.

  92 (a) to 92 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  93 (a) and 93 (b) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (f). .

  In addition, the time series of FIGS. 92 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 93 (a) to (b) are the same as the time series of FIGS. 90 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 91 (a) to (b). It may be.

  FIG. 92 (a) shows a case where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is four. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 92 (b) following FIG. 92 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  Following FIG. 92 (b), in FIG. 92 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues the variable display. In FIG. 92 (c), the pattern 703s applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703s surrounds one of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c (in FIG. 92D, the middle symbol display area 208b). Lights are displayed (to surround the decorative pattern). The surroundings of a plurality of decorative symbols and effects may be displayed in a light-emitting manner with a pattern applied to the transmissive member 703. The light-emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be provided on the front side of at least a part of another decorative design or a light emitting display of a pattern applied to another transmission part.

  By the way, in the production, for example, the difference in the reliability of the jackpot may be represented by the difference in the pattern to be lit and displayed among the patterns applied to the transmissive member 703. For example, the effect of emitting and displaying the pattern 703s can be set to be lower in reliability than the effect of emitting and displaying the pattern 703t shown in FIG. It should be noted that the light-emitting display effect of this pattern may be performed when the variation is at least a big hit, and the light-emitting display effect of this pattern may be performed only when the variation is lost. In addition, the effect of the light emission display of this pattern may be more likely to occur when the fluctuation is larger than the big hit, vice versa, or may be performed at the same frequency.

  Following FIG. 92 (c), in FIG. 92 (d), the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a are stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703s continues.

  Following FIG. 92 (d), in FIG. 92 (e), the decorative symbols in the right symbol display area 208c are stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703s continues.

  Following FIG. 92 (e), in FIG. 92 (f), fluctuation variation is performed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. The light emission display of the pattern 703s continues. In FIG. 92 (f), the light emission display of the pattern 703s may be stopped in accordance with the start of fluctuation fluctuation.

  Following FIG. 92 (f), in FIG. 93 (a), the fluctuation variation in which the decorative symbol is displayed while shaking in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is continued. In FIG. 93 (a), the light emission display of the pattern 703s stops while shaking fluctuation is continued. That is, the light emission display of the pattern 703s disappears before the stop display of the decorative symbol. Note that the light emission display of the pattern 703s may be stopped before the decorative symbol stop display (including fluctuation fluctuation), or the light emission display of the pattern 703s may be stopped after the symbol stop.

  93 (a), in FIG. 93 (b), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Stop display at.

  In addition, the pattern displayed by light emission may be a pattern that emerges by emitting light from a plurality of light sources at different positions. The same applies to the examples described below.

  94 (a) to 94 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative design display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (f). .

  In addition, the time series of FIGS. 94 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 95 (a) to (b) are the same as the time series of FIGS. 90 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 91 (a) to (b). It may be. It may be different.

  FIG. 94 (a) shows a case where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is four. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 94 (b) following FIG. 94 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  94 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues the variable display in FIG. 94 (c). In FIG. 94 (c), the pattern 703t applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703t hides one of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c (in FIG. 94D, the middle symbol display area 208b). The display is lit (to hide the decorative pattern). It should be noted that a plurality of decorative symbols, effect displays, etc. may be displayed in a light-emitting manner with a pattern provided on the transmissive member 703. The light-emitting display of the pattern provided on the transmissive member 703 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be provided on the front side of at least a part of another decorative pattern to be displayed or a light-emitting display of a pattern applied to another transmission part.

  By the way, in the production, for example, the difference in the reliability of the jackpot may be represented by the difference in the pattern to be lit and displayed among the patterns applied to the transmissive member 703. For example, the effect of emitting and displaying the pattern 703t can be set with higher reliability than the effect of emitting and displaying the pattern 703s shown in FIG. It should be noted that the light-emitting display effect of this pattern may be performed when the variation is at least a big hit, and the light-emitting display effect of this pattern may be performed only when the variation is lost. In addition, the effect of the light emission display of this pattern may be more likely to occur when the fluctuation is larger than the big hit, vice versa, or may be performed at the same frequency.

  After FIG. 94 (c), in FIG. 94 (d), the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a are stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t is continued.

  Following FIG. 94 (d), in FIG. 94 (e), the decorative symbols in the right symbol display area 208c are stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t is continued.

  After FIG. 94 (e), in FIG. 94 (f), fluctuation fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The light emission display of the pattern 703t is continued. In FIG. 94 (f), the light emission display of the pattern 703t may be stopped in accordance with the start of fluctuation fluctuation.

  After FIG. 94 (f), in FIG. 95 (a), the fluctuation variation in which the decorative symbol is displayed while shaking in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is continued. In FIG. 95 (a), the light emission display of the pattern 703s is also continued while shaking fluctuation is continued.

  95 (b), in FIG. 95 (b), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Stop display at. The stop of the light emission display of the pattern 703t is performed after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. Note that the light emission display of the pattern 703t may be stopped before the decorative symbol stop display, and during the stop of the decorative symbol display (in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214). The light emission display of the pattern 703t may be stopped until the display is stopped.

  96 (a) to 96 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (f). .

  FIG. 96 (a) shows a case where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is four. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 96 (b) following FIG. 96 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  96 (b), in FIG. 96 (c), an effect is provided in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol variation display is, for example, a corner region provided in the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Displayed at 208j2.

  Following FIG. 96 (c), in FIG. 96 (d), the effect carried out in the central region 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is advanced. In the performance performed in the central area 208j1, for example, there is a case where the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the item that comes out of the treasure box. There is.

  Following FIG. 96 (d), in FIG. 96 (e), a pattern 703u applied to the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703u is displayed in a light-emitting manner so as to surround the effect (here, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variable game. In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern 703u is performed after the display of the fan. The light emission display of the pattern 703u may be started almost simultaneously with the start of display of the fan, or the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be started before the fan is displayed.

  Following FIG. 96 (e), in FIG. 96 (f), the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. . In the present embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped during the decorative symbol stop display (including fluctuation fluctuation), or the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped after the decorative design is stopped. Note that the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped simultaneously with the disappearance of the fan display, or the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be stopped before the fan display disappears.

  After FIG. 96 (f), in FIG. 97 (a), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and reach display is performed.

  Following FIG. 97 (a), in FIG. 97 (b), shaking fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  Following FIG. 97 (b), in FIG. 97 (c), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Stop display at.

  98 (a) to 98 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (c) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (f). .

  FIG. 98 (a) shows a case where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is four. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 98 (a), in FIG. 98 (b), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 98 (c) following FIG. 98 (b), an effect is provided in the central area 208 j 1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol variation display is, for example, a corner region provided in the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Displayed at 208j2.

  Following FIG. 98 (c), in FIG. 98 (d), the effect carried out in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is advanced. In the performance performed in the central area 208j1, for example, there is a case where the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the article that comes out of the treasure box. Here, the fan is an effect that suggests the reliability of the variable game. There is.

  Following FIG. 98 (d), in FIG. 98 (e), a pattern 703u applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). Further, a pattern 703v applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703u is displayed in a light-emitting manner so as to surround the effect (here, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variable game. In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern 703u is performed after the display of the fan. The light emission display of the pattern 703u may be started almost simultaneously with the start of display of the fan, or the light emission display of the pattern 703u may be started before the fan is displayed. The pattern 703v is luminescently displayed so as to hide a part of the fan. In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern 703v is started after the display of the fan. The light emission display of the pattern 703v may be started before the display of the fan, or the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be started simultaneously with the start of the display of the fan.

  Following FIG. 98 (e), in FIG. 98 (f), in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the decorative symbol is stopped. . In the present embodiment, after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any one of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are performed. Has continued. The light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may always be displayed, or may be in a state of being repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the color of the light emitting display of the pattern 703u and the color of the light emitting display of the pattern 703v may be made different or the same color.

  Following FIG. 98 (f), in FIG. 99 (a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and reach display is performed. Also at this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are continued.

  Following FIG. 99 (a), in FIG. 99 (b), fluctuation fluctuation is displayed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 99 (b) shows a case where the variable game is out of place. At this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are stopped (always lit). It is not necessary to stop.

  In addition, the effect display for super reach may be performed between the state of Fig.99 (a) and the state of FIG.99 (b). In that case, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be stopped before the display of the state of FIG. 99 (a) is switched to the super reach display, and the display is switched to the super reach display. Before the display, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be stopped. After switching to the super reach display, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are stopped. May be. During super reach, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be stopped, or may be continued as they are. Further, during super reach, a light emitting display different from that during variable display of decorative symbols may be performed on the transmission part (various colors, patterns, lighting patterns, etc.).

  Following FIG. 99 (b), in FIG. 99 (c), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Stop display at. In FIG. 99 (c), a fixed display is displayed when the variable game is out of play. In the present embodiment, an example in which the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is performed when the variable game is out of place is shown, but the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is performed even when the variable game is a big hit. You may do it. At least a part or all of the same effects (including the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member) may be performed in the case where the variable game is out of play and in the case of the big hit. In addition, in the case where the variable game is out of play and big hit, an effect (including a light-emitting display of a pattern applied to the transmissive member) that is at least partially or entirely different may be performed.

  FIGS. 100 to 108 are diagrams illustrating examples of gaming machines in which a pre-reading effect is performed by light emission of a pattern of a transmissive portion. FIG. 100 and FIG. 101 are examples of effects performed when a lottery is not won by pre-reading notice execution processing (for example, pre-reading notice execution processing performed in FIGS. 43 and 44). 102 to 108 are examples of effects performed when a lottery is won by prefetching notice execution processing (for example, prefetching notice execution processing performed in FIGS. 43 and 44). FIGS. 100A to 100F are diagrams sequentially showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion.

  101 (a) to 101 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 100 (a) to 100 (f). .

  FIG. 100 (a) shows a case where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the number of special figure 1 variable games held is two. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 100 (a), in FIG. 100 (b), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  Following FIG. 100 (b), in FIG. 100 (c), an effect is provided in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol variation display is a corner region provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. Displayed at 208j2. Further, FIG. 100 (c) shows a state in which there is a prize at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of special figure 1 variable games held is increased by one. In the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, an icon for the hold added this time is added and displayed further inside the hold icon displayed on the innermost side among the hold icons already displayed.

  Following FIG. 100 (c), in FIG. 100 (d), the effect implemented in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is advanced. In the performance performed in the central area 208j1, for example, there is a case where the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the article that comes out of the treasure box. Here, the fan is an effect that suggests the reliability of the variable game. There is.

  Following FIG. 100 (d), in FIG. 100 (e), a pattern 703u applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). Further, a pattern 703v applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703u is displayed in a light-emitting manner so as to surround the effect (here, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variable game. The pattern 703v is luminescently displayed so as to hide a part of the fan.

  Following FIG. 100 (e), in FIG. 100 (f), the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. . In the present embodiment, after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any one of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are performed. Has continued.

  Subsequent to FIG. 100 (f), in FIG. 101 (a), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Also at this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are continued.

  Following FIG. 101 (a), in FIG. 101 (b), fluctuation fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 101 (b) shows a case where the variable game is out of place. At this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are stopped.

  Following FIG. 101 (b), in FIG. 101 (c), fluctuations are continued in the left symbol display area 208 a, the middle symbol display area 208 b and the right symbol display area 208 c.

  Following FIG. 101 (c), in FIG. 101 (d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Stop display at. In FIG. 101 (d), a fixed display is displayed when the variable game is out of play.

  Here, among the hold icons displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the hold icon to be digested in the next special figure 1 variable game is indicated by the icon 732aa, and the next special figure 1 change is further displayed. The hold icon that is consumed by the game is indicated by an icon 732ab.

  In FIG. 101 (e) following FIG. 101 (d), in starting the next special figure 1 variable game that has been suspended, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Before the decorative symbol is variably displayed, the movement animation of the hold icon is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the movement animation of the hold icon may be performed simultaneously with the variation display of the decorative symbol, or the movement animation may be performed after the start of the variation display. In the movement animation of the hold icon, for example, the display of the icon 732aa is gradually thinned, and the icon 732ab moves outward. Eventually, the icon 732aa disappears and the icon 732ab is displayed at the position where the icon 732aa was displayed. The start of the variation display of the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 may be started before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be started at the same time. Moreover, the start of the variable display of the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 may be started before the start of the moving animation of the hold icon, or may be started at the same time.

  Following FIG. 101 (e), in FIG. 101 (f), decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a is displayed. Then, the icon 732ab is displayed most outward.

  102 (a) to 102 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  103 (a) to 103 (f) are diagrams sequentially showing FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (f), and show specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order. .

  FIG. 102 (a) shows a case where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game hold number is two. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 102 (a), in FIG. 102 (b), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  102 (c), in FIG. 102 (c), an effect is provided in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol variation display is, for example, a corner region provided in the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Displayed at 208j2. Further, FIG. 102 (c) shows a state in which there is a prize at the first special figure starting port 230 and one special figure 1 variable game has been put on hold. In the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, an icon 732ab for the added hold is added and displayed further inside the hold icon 732aa displayed on the innermost side among the hold icons already displayed. . In addition, a pattern 703w applied to the transmission member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side). The pattern 703w is displayed in a light-emitting manner so as to surround the periphery of the additionally displayed icon 732ab. The light-emitting display of the pattern 703w can be used as a pre-reading effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit as a result of the above-mentioned pre-read lottery process. In the present embodiment, after the icon 732ab is displayed, the pattern 703w is displayed by light emission. Note that the pattern 703w may be displayed by light emission simultaneously with the display of the icon 732ab, or the pattern 703w may be displayed by light emission before the display of the icon 732ab.

  Following FIG. 102 (c), in FIG. 102 (d), the effect being performed in the central area 208 j 1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is advanced. In the performance performed in the central area 208j1, for example, there is a case where the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the article that comes out of the treasure box. Here, the fan is an effect that suggests the reliability of the variable game. There is. The light emission display of the pattern 703w is continued.

  Following FIG. 102 (d), in FIG. 102 (e), a pattern 703u applied to the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side). Further, a pattern 703v applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703u is displayed in a light-emitting manner so as to surround the effect (here, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variable game. The pattern 703v is luminescently displayed so as to hide a part of the fan. The light emission display of the pattern 703w is continued. In the present embodiment, the light sources (irradiation means) for emitting and displaying the patterns 703w and the patterns 703u and 703v are different (for example, the directions of the lens cuts are different). As a result, it is possible to display only the pattern 703w and one of the patterns 703u and 703v with light emission (irradiation with only one of the irradiation means) and to display both with light emission (irradiation with both irradiation means). It should be noted that the light source (irradiation means) for emitting and displaying each of the pattern 703w and the patterns 703u and 703v may be the same. In the present embodiment, the pattern 703w and the patterns 703u and 703v are lit and displayed in different colors. Note that the pattern 703w and the patterns 703u and 703v may be lit and displayed in the same color.

  Following FIG. 102 (e), in FIG. 102 (f), in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and in the left symbol display area 208a, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. . In the present embodiment, after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any one of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are performed. And the light emission display of the pattern 703w is continued.

  Following FIG. 102 (f), in FIG. 103 (a), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Also at this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u, the light emission display of the pattern 703v, and the light emission display of the pattern 703w are continued.

  Following FIG. 103 (a), in FIG. 103 (b), shaking fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbol is displayed while shaking in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. FIG. 103 (b) shows a case where the variable game is out of place. At this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are stopped before the start of fluctuation fluctuation. The light emission display of the pattern 703w is continued. Note that the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v may be stopped after the start of fluctuation fluctuation, or may be stopped simultaneously, such as fluctuation fluctuation.

  Following FIG. 103 (b), in FIG. 103 (c), fluctuations are continued in the left symbol display area 208 a, the middle symbol display area 208 b and the right symbol display area 208 c.

  Following FIG. 103 (c), in FIG. 103 (d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Stop display at. The light emission display of the pattern 703w is continued. In FIG. 103 (d), a fixed display is displayed when the variable game is out of play. The light emission display of the pattern 703w may be stopped during the stop display of the decorative symbol, and may be displayed again so as to surround the hold icon at the start of the next variable symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 103 (e) following FIG. 103 (d), in starting the next special figure 1 variable game that has been suspended, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Before the decorative symbol is variably displayed, the movement animation of the hold icon is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the movement animation of the hold icon may be performed simultaneously with the variation display of the decorative symbol, or the movement animation may be performed after the start of the variation display. In the movement animation of the hold icon, for example, the display of the icon 732aa is gradually thinned, and the icon 732ab moves outward. Eventually, the icon 732aa disappears and the icon 732ab is displayed at the position where the icon 732aa was displayed. The start of the variation display of the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 may be started before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be started at the same time. Moreover, the start of the variable display of the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 may be started before the start of the moving animation of the hold icon, or may be started at the same time. In the present embodiment, the amount of light emitted by the irradiating means, which is a light source, is gradually reduced so that the light emission display of the pattern 703w gradually fades after the hold icon movement animation is started. Note that the light emission display of the pattern 703w may gradually disappear during the movement animation of the hold icon, or the light emission display of the pattern 703w may turn off after the hold icon 732ab is moved. For example, if the LED as the light source is controlled to gradually decrease the brightness, the pattern appears to disappear gradually, and if the LED is controlled to be turned off immediately, the pattern appears to disappear immediately.

  Following FIG. 103 (e), in FIG. 103 (f), decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a is displayed. Then, the icon 732ab is displayed most outward. The light emission display of the pattern 703w is stopped. In this embodiment, after the icon 732ab is moved, a pattern 703x different from the pattern 703w is displayed by light emission. The pattern 703x illuminates to surround the moved icon 732ab. It should be noted that the pattern 703x may be lit and displayed before the hold icon 732ab is moved, or the pattern 703x may be lit and displayed while the hold icon 732ab is moved. The light emission display of the pattern 703x may be gradually brightened (displayed gradually darker).

  When the symbol variation started from FIG. 103 (e) ends and the next symbol variation starts, the pattern 703x may disappear at the same time as the icon 732ab. In addition, the pattern 703x may disappear before the icon 732ab, or disappear after the icon 732ab.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed on the game board 200, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The transmissive member 703 described above is provided on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the 703y display pattern 703y of the transmissive area provided on the transmissive member 703 is a decorative symbol display as viewed from the player. It is provided at a position overlapping with the device 208. The pattern 703y is displayed in a light-emitting manner so as to overlap with a portion other than the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The pattern 703y includes a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, a special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, a special graphic 2 hold icon display area 732b, and a special graphic 1 fourth graphic area. 731a may be displayed in a light emitting manner so as not to overlap with the fourth symbol region 731b for special figure 2, or may be displayed in a light emitting manner so as to be partially hidden by overlapping with any one of these. It may be displayed in a light-emitting manner so as to overlap and hide everything.

  105 (a) to 105 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (f). .

  FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (c) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative design display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (f). .

  108 (a) to 108 (e) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (c). .

  FIG. 105 (a) shows a case where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is two. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 105 (a), in FIG. 105 (b), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  105 (b), in FIG. 105 (c), an effect is provided in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol variation display is, for example, a corner region provided at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Displayed at 208j2. Further, FIG. 105 (c) shows a state in which there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 variable game hold is increased by one. In the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, an icon 732ab for the added hold is added and displayed further inside the hold icon 732aa displayed on the innermost side among the hold icons already displayed. .

  Following FIG. 105 (c), in FIG. 105 (d), the effect carried out in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is advanced. In the performance performed in the central area 208j1, for example, there is a case where the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the article that comes out of the treasure box. Here, the fan is an effect that suggests the reliability of the variable game. There is.

  Following FIG. 105 (d), in FIG. 105 (e), a pattern 703u applied to the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). Further, a pattern 703v applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703u is displayed in a light-emitting manner so as to surround the effect (here, a fan) that suggests the reliability of the variable game. The pattern 703v is luminescently displayed so as to hide a part of the fan.

  Following FIG. 105 (e), in FIG. 105 (f), the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. . In the present embodiment, after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any one of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are performed. Has continued.

  Following FIG. 105 (f), in FIG. 106 (a), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Also at this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are continued.

  Following FIG. 106 (a), in FIG. 106 (b), shaking fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. FIG. 106 (b) shows a case where the variable game is out of place. At this time, the light emission display of the pattern 703u and the light emission display of the pattern 703v are stopped.

  Following FIG. 106 (b), in FIG. 106 (c), fluctuations in shaking are continued in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  Following FIG. 106 (c), in FIG. 106 (d), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Stop display at. In FIG. 106 (d), a fixed display is displayed when the variable game is out of play.

  Following FIG. 106 (d), in FIG. 106 (e), in starting the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the held icon 732aa, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 732a, The displayed icon 732aa is deleted, and the icon 732ab is moved to the position where the icon 732aa was present and displayed. Thereafter, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, a pattern 703y applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side). The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner. In the present embodiment, after the icon 732ab is moved, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In addition, the light emission display of the pattern 703y is started after the decorative symbol variation display is started. It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern 703y may be started before the start of the variation of the decorative design, or the light emission display of the pattern 703y may be performed simultaneously with the start of the variation of the decoration design. The light emission display of the pattern 703y can be used as a pre-reading effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit in the result of the above-mentioned pre-read lottery process for the hold corresponding to the icon 732ab.

  Following FIG. 106 (e), in FIG. 106 (f), decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The light emission display of the pattern 703y is continued.

  Following FIG. 106 (f), in FIG. 107 (a), fluctuation fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 107 (a) shows a case where the variable game is out of place. The light emission display of the pattern 703y is continued.

  Following FIG. 107 (a), in FIG. 107 (b), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Stop display at. In FIG. 107 (d), a fixed display is displayed when the variable game is out of play. The light emission display of the pattern 703y is continued.

  Following FIG. 107 (b), in FIG. 107 (c), in starting the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the icon 732ab that has been held, the icon 732ab is gradually displayed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a. Make it thinner and erase. Thereafter, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The light emission display of the pattern 703y continues. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  Following FIG. 107 (c), in FIG. 108 (a), decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The light emission display of the pattern 703y is continued.

  Following FIG. 108 (a), in FIG. 108 (b), the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c display the decorative symbols in a stopped state, and the middle symbol display area 208b displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner and reach display. I am doing. The light emission display of the pattern 703y is continued.

  Following FIG. 108B, in FIG. 108C, the light emission display of the pattern 703y is stopped. In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern 703y is stopped after the reach display is performed. The light emission display of the pattern 703y may be stopped before the reach display is performed, or the light emission display of the pattern 703y may be stopped simultaneously with the reach display.

  Following FIG. 108 (c), in FIG. 108 (d), fluctuation fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 108 (d) shows a case where the variable game is out of place.

  Following FIG. 108 (d), in FIG. 108 (e), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Will stop display. In FIG. 108 (e), a fixed display is displayed when the variable game is out of play.

  In this example, the pattern 703y used as the prefetching effect and the patterns 703u and 703v that are not the prefetching effect are not displayed simultaneously. Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the display of the decorative symbol displayed on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 from becoming difficult to see due to the light emission of the pattern. Note that the pattern 703y used as the prefetching effect and the patterns 703u and 703v that are not the prefetching effect may be displayed at the same time.

  109 (a) and 109 (b) and FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) are diagrams illustrating examples of effects performed on the game board 200, and are schematic front views of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. is there. The same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the example of FIG. 109 (a), a big hit start display state in which the start of the big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In the present embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member during the big hit start display is not performed. Further, the variable winning opening 234 is not opened during the big hit start display. In addition, you may perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member during the big hit start display. Note that the variable winning opening 234 may be open during the big hit start display.

  In the example of FIG. 109 (b), the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is performed a predetermined number of times in the process for the big hit (in the case of the present embodiment, 15 round big hits, 15 times, 2 round big hits, (2 times) A round display state in which the number of rounds at the time of repetition is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In FIG. 109 (b), “5R”, which is the current round number, is displayed on the round display portion 208k, and “7” is displayed on the winning symbol display portion 208m indicating the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed at the time of the big hit. it's shown. In this embodiment, the patterns 703A, 703B, 703C, and 703D applied to the transmissive member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side) are displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member during the round display is performed. The display between rounds (for example, when switching from 5R to 6R) is also performed with the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member. Note that there may be a case where the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed during the round display (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the two-dimensional code or during the probable promotion effect, During the suggestion effect, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed. Moreover, you may make it not perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member during the display between rounds.

  It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern on the transmissive member may always be the same color for all the patterns, or one of the patterns may or may not display the light. The patterns may be displayed in different colors, and the display modes may be variously changed.

  In the present embodiment, the pattern 703D is luminescently displayed so as to hide the winning symbol display portion 208m. The winning symbol display portion 208m may not be hidden. In the present embodiment, the round display portion 208k is not hidden by the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member. Note that the round display portion 208k may be hidden by a light emitting display of a pattern applied to the transmissive member.

  In the present embodiment, the pattern 703C is lit and displayed so as to cover the right variable winning opening 234, and is further lit and displayed so as to cover a part of the special figure 2 starting port 232. In addition, at least when the variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed, at least a pattern of light emission is displayed. In addition, the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member may not cover the periphery of the variable prize opening 234, and may not cover a part of the special figure 2 starting port 232. Note that the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed only while the variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed only while the variable winning opening 234 is closed. May be.

  The example of FIG. 110A shows a state in which a lower pan full error is displayed in the error display field 208n of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the patterns 703A, 703B, 703C, and 703D applied to the transmissive member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side) are displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  In the present embodiment, during the error display in the error display field 208n, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is performed as before the error display. During the error display (including the lower plate full tank error), the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed, and a specific error display (for example, a magnetic detection related to the so-called goto action or a payout system) In the case of a serious error such as an error, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed. Further, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member performed during the error display may be the same display mode as that during the big hit, or may be a display mode different from that during the big hit. In FIG. 110 (a), four heart-shaped patterns are emitted and displayed as the pattern applied to the transmissive member, but the number may be 0 or any number. In this embodiment, the pattern 703C is lit and displayed so as to cover the right variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 234 is open and is not covered by the pattern applied to the transmissive member. The central variable winning opening 234 is closed. That is, the light-emitting display may be performed so that only the open variable prize opening 234 is covered with the pattern formed on the transmissive member.

  In the example of FIG. 110B, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed during the display indicating the next gaming state such as the probability fluctuation entry. Even when the next game state is being displayed, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. In that case, the display mode is the same as the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member during the big hit. It may be performed or different.

  111 (a) and 111 (b) are diagrams illustrating examples of effects performed on the game board 200, and are schematic front views of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the example of FIG. 111 (a), the frame lamp 122 is turned on. In the present embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed while the frame lamp such as the frame lamp 122 or the lamp of the panel (including the LED, for example) is lit. It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed even when the lamp of the frame or board is on.

In the example of FIG. 111 (b), the frame lamp 122 is not lit. In this embodiment, a pattern 703E applied to the transparent member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side) while a frame or board lamp (such as an LED) such as the frame lamp 122 is turned off. To do. The pattern 703E is a pattern in which a logo display such as “Yoshimune” related to the model name of the game machine is displayed. In addition, you may perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member, while the lamp | ramp of a frame or a board is lighting.
While the LED on the frame or board is turned off, the glass emits light. In addition, advertisement display (manufacturer's name, model name, specifications) and system display (right-handed suggestion display, brightness adjustment display, etc.) may be performed by the light-emitting display of the pattern on the transparent member. Good.

  Further, for example, by changing the mode such as the energy saving mode, control may be performed to switch between the mode for performing the control in FIG. 111 (a) and the mode for performing the control in FIG. 111 (b).

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed on the game board 200, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the game machine 100 is turned on (including power recovery after power interruption), the lamp on the frame side (for example, the frame lamp 122) and the light emission display of the pattern 703F on the transmissive member are caused to emit light simultaneously. The lamp on the panel side is not lit. In addition, after the lamp on the frame side is turned on, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed, or vice versa. Further, the lamp on the panel side may be turned on when the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed. All of these combinations are possible.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the game board 200 different from FIG. 30, and is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front.

  A liquid crystal display device 208A is provided on the top of the decorative symbol display device 208, and shutters 246A and 246B for driving the display area of the liquid crystal display device 208A to be opened and closed are provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 208A.

  114 (a) to 114 (d) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  115 (a) to 115 (d) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects produced by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (d). .

  116 (a) to 116 (d) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (d). .

  117 (a) to 117 (b) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order, following FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (d). .

  FIG. 114 (a) shows a case where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the special figure 1 variable game hold number is four. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. A liquid crystal display device 208 </ b> A is provided above the decorative symbol display device 208. The liquid crystal display device 208A is provided with shutters 246A and 246B that drive the display area to be openable and closable, but the liquid crystal display device 208A may not be provided with the shutters 246A and 246B. Further, the liquid crystal display device 208A may display the same information as the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, background display, hold display, a notice indicating the reliability of the variation, a decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, etc. May be displayed.

  In FIG. 114 (b) following FIG. 114 (a), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  114 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues the variable display in FIG. 114 (c). In FIG. 114 (c), the pattern 703t applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703t hides one of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c (in FIG. 114D, the middle symbol display area 208b). The display is lit (to hide the decorative pattern). It should be noted that a plurality of decorative symbols, effect displays, etc. may be displayed in a light-emitting manner with a pattern provided on the transmissive member 703. The light-emitting display of the pattern provided on the transmissive member 703 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be provided on the front side of at least a part of another decorative pattern to be displayed or a light-emitting display of a pattern applied to another transmission part.

  The liquid crystal display device 208A is a movable movable body, and FIG. 114 (c) shows the liquid crystal display device 208A in the position before the movement. In FIG. 114 (c), the pattern formed on the transmissive member performs light emission display at a position where the liquid crystal display device 208A before movement is not covered. In addition, you may perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member in the position which covers the liquid crystal display device 208A before a movement. Alternatively, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed at a position covering both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the liquid crystal display device 208A before movement.

  Following FIG. 114 (c), in FIG. 114 (d), the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a are stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t is continued.

  In FIG. 115 (a) following FIG. 114 (d), the decorative symbols in the right symbol display area 208c are stopped and displayed. The light emission display of the pattern 703t is continued. The liquid crystal display device 208A also performs reach display.

  115 (b), in FIG. 115 (b), in the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a super reach effect that is a reach accompanied by switching of the screen background is performed, and in the liquid crystal display device 208A, the decorative symbol is displayed. Reach display in the variable display. The light emitting display of the pattern 703t stops before switching to the super reach effect. Note that the light emission display of the pattern 703t may disappear during the switching from FIG. 115 (a) to FIG. 115 (b), or the light emission display of the pattern 703t may disappear after switching to the super reach effect. Moreover, you may continue the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member. In that case, the display mode of the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be the light emitting display of the pattern 703t as in FIG. 115A, or may be different.

  115 (b), FIG. 115 (c) shows a pattern with a different display mode (for example, the same pattern but different size) from the pattern 703t at a certain timing during the super reach production. A light emission display of the pattern 703G applied to the transmissive member 703 is performed. The pattern 703G also performs light emission display at a position where the liquid crystal display device 208A before movement is not covered. The patterns 703t and 703G may be patterns that emerge by emitting light from a plurality of light sources at different positions. When the pattern 703t emits light, the light source that emits the pattern 703G may be turned off. Good. Moreover, the reverse may be sufficient.

  In FIG. 115 (d) following FIG. 115 (c), an effect is advanced on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Following FIG. 115 (d), in FIG. 116 (a), the liquid crystal display device 208A starts moving before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The liquid crystal display device 208A displays the fluctuation of the decorative pattern. The liquid crystal display device 208A may start moving simultaneously with the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the liquid crystal display device 208A may start moving after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. While the liquid crystal display device 208A is moving, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed, but the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. In that case, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed before the movement of the liquid crystal display device 208A, or it may be moving or may be moved.

  116 (a), the liquid crystal display device 208A moves to the position of the central region 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 116 (b). Even after the movement of the liquid crystal display device 208A, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed. In addition, you may perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member at this time. In that case, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member so as to hide at least a part of the decorative design may be performed, or the light emission display of the pattern may be performed so as not to hide it.

  116 (b), the liquid crystal display device 208A returns from the position of the central area 208j1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the upper portion of the original decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 116 (c). Even when the liquid crystal display device 208A returns, the light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed. In addition, you may perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member at this time.

  FIG. 116 (d) following FIG. 116 (c) shows a state where the liquid crystal display device 208 </ b> A has returned to the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Following FIG. 116 (d), in FIG. 117 (a), fluctuation fluctuation is performed in which the decorative symbols are displayed while shaking in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the liquid crystal display device 208A, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts switching from the super reach effect to the stop display of the decorative symbol, and at the same time, the displayed fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is erased. It should be noted that the decoration symbol in the liquid crystal display device 208A may be erased before the start of switching to the stop display of the decoration symbol in the decoration symbol display device 208, or may be erased later.

  Following FIG. 117 (a), in FIG. 117 (b), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed. Stop display at.

  118 (a) to 118 (f) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order.

  118 (a) shows a case in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is four. The 4th symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 118 (a), in FIG. 118 (b), the reserved special figure 1 variable game is started, and decorative symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In the variable display, in the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a, the icon displayed most outward is deleted, and other icons are sequentially shifted outward and displayed. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner.

  Following FIG. 118 (b), in FIG. 118 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues the variable display. In FIG. 118 (c), the pattern 703t applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side).

  Following FIG. 118 (c), FIG. 118 (d) shows a state in which an error requesting to call an attendant is displayed in the error display field 208n of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. This error may be, for example, a serious error such as magnetic detection related to a so-called goto action or a payout error, or an error in which a game cannot be continued. The luminous display of the pattern on the transmissive member is erased before this error display is displayed. The light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off at the same timing as the error display display, or the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off after the error display is displayed.

  Following FIG. 118D, in FIG. 118E, the error display in the error display field 208n of the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued.

  Following FIG. 118 (e), in FIG. 118 (f), the error display in the error display field 208n of the decorative symbol display device 208 is continued. In addition, you may make it perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member also during error display. In that case, the light emission display of a pattern having a display mode different from that before the error display may be performed, or the light emission display of a pattern having the same display mode as that before the error display may be performed. When the error is resolved, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. The light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed depending on the type of error. For example, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed at the time of door opening notification, and the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed at an illegal error. In some cases, a player who is playing a game correctly can be penalized without a penalty.

  119 (a) to 119 (f) are diagrams sequentially illustrating a specific example of the demonstration screen display and the light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 119 (a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and a demo image is displayed in the background. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 are stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 119 (a), in FIG. 119 (b), a display indicating that the option menu can be displayed is displayed in the display field 208o. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 208 may display with the symbols stopped while the symbol variation is stopped. Even when the display field 208o as shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed, the option menu cannot be displayed for a predetermined time from the symbol stop (for example, 1.5 seconds after the symbol stop) and can be displayed. Then, the display as shown in FIG. Furthermore, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol stop, the display of FIG. 119 (b) may not be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds after the display becomes possible).

  Following FIG. 119 (b), in FIG. 119 (c), the pattern 703H applied to the transparent member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703H is lit and displayed so as to hide a part of the display field 208o.

  Following FIG. 119 (c), in FIG. 119 (d), a display (display field 208o) indicating that the menu can be displayed even while a demonstration video such as display of the title of the model of the game machine is flowing. May be performed. In this case, the display (display field 208o) indicating that the menu can be displayed may not be performed. Also at this time, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. The light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed.

  In FIG. 119 (e) following FIG. 119 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 with reference to the display in the display field 208o, for example, the gaming table 100 receives this and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 208. Displays the option menu. When the option menu is displayed by the player's operation, the light emission display of the pattern 703H applied to the transmissive member 703 is stopped, and the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member disappears. In this embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member after the player's operation is turned off. Note that the light emission display of the pattern on the transmissive member may be turned off simultaneously with the player's operation. In FIG. 119 (e), as the option menu, operations such as “user menu”, “model information”, “hit history”, “sound adjustment”, and “brightness adjustment” can be selected and input. For these operations, for example, the player operates the operation button 136a to input an operation to the gaming table 100.

  Following FIG. 119 (e), FIG. 119 (f) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 when the player selects “Sound adjustment” in FIG. 119 (e). In this screen, the player can operate the operation button 136a to input an operation to the gaming table 100 and adjust the volume. The pattern applied to the transparent member is not performed on the screen on which the operation by the player is performed. In addition, you may perform the pattern given to the transparent member on the screen where operation by a player is performed.

  In addition, in the option menu of FIG. 119 (e), the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transparent member is continued, and the “user MENU screen” and “model information screen” which are the next screens after the player operates in the option menu. In the case of “big hit history screen”, “sound adjustment screen” (FIG. 119 (f)), “brightness adjustment screen”, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed. In this case, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off after the display is switched to the next screen after the player operates in the option menu. Note that the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transparent member may be turned off at the same time as the display is switched to the next screen after the player operates in the option menu. Note that the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off before the display is switched to the next screen after the player operates in the option menu. Further, the light-emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member after the player operates in the option menu may be turned off. Note that the light emission display of the pattern on the transparent member may be turned off at the same time that the player operates in the option menu. Note that the light emission display of the pattern on the transmissive member may be turned off before the player operates the option menu.

  120A to 120F are diagrams showing specific examples of the demonstration screen display and the light emission of the pattern of the transmissive portion in order in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In FIG. 120 (a), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and a demo image is displayed in the background. The fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol area 731b for special figure 2 are stopped and displayed.

  Following FIG. 120A, in FIG. 120B, a display indicating that the menu can be displayed is displayed in the display field 208o. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 208 may display with the symbols stopped while the symbol variation is stopped. Further, even when the display field 208o as shown in FIG. 120B is displayed, the menu cannot be displayed for a predetermined time from the symbol stop (for example, 1.5 seconds after the symbol stop), and can be displayed. After that, the display as shown in FIG. Furthermore, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol stop, the display of FIG. 120B may not be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds after the display becomes possible).

  Following FIG. 120 (b), in FIG. 120 (c), a pattern 703H applied to the transmissive member 703 is displayed in a light-emitting manner in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side). The pattern 703H is lit and displayed so as to hide a part of the display field 208o.

  Following FIG. 120 (c), in FIG. 120 (d), a display (display field 208o) indicating that the menu can be displayed even while a demonstration video such as the display of the title of the gaming machine model is flowing. May be performed. In this case, the display (display field 208o) indicating that the menu can be displayed may not be performed. Also at this time, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be performed. The light emitting display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may not be performed.

  In FIG. 120 (e) following FIG. 120 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 with reference to the display in the display field 208o, for example, the gaming table 100 receives this and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 208. Display the menu. At this time, in the operation guide display field 208s at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display for guiding the player on the operation on the menu screen is performed. In this embodiment, icons 208p, 208q and 208r are displayed in the operation guidance display field 208s. The icon 208p and the icon 208q are icons corresponding to the operation button 136a, and the icon 208r is an icon corresponding to the chance button 136. The operation button 136a is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the operation guidance display field 208s, the icon 208p includes, for example, buttons (four buttons on the top, bottom, left, and right) used for menu item selection among the operation buttons 136a. In the icon 208q, a button (one button in the center) used for determining the selection item of the menu screen among the operation buttons 136a is displayed in, for example, a color, and in the icon 208r, a chance to determine the selection item of the menu screen is displayed. Indicates that button 136 can also be used. When the menu is displayed by the player's operation, the light emission display of the pattern 703H applied to the transmissive member 703 is continued. In this embodiment, the pattern 703H is lit and displayed so as to hide at least a part of the operation guidance display field 208s. It should be noted that the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member does not have to hide the operation guide display field 208s. In the present embodiment, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is performed in the same display mode before and after displaying the menu. In addition, the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member in different display modes (at least one of the number, color, shape, size, brightness, display position, etc. of the pattern is different) before and after displaying the menu May be performed. In FIG. 120 (e), it is possible to select and input operations such as “member registration”, “password input”, “two-dimensional code issuance”, “personal data clear”, and “end” as menus. For these operations, for example, the player operates the operation button 136a to input an operation to the gaming table 100.

  FIG. 120 (f) following FIG. 120 (e) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 when the player selects “member registration” in FIG. 120 (e). On this screen, a two-dimensional code is displayed, and a player who has obtained a password using this two-dimensional code operates the operation button 136a to input the password to the gaming table 100, for example, and register as a member. It can be performed. During the display of the two-dimensional code, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member is not performed. If the display is lit, it may be difficult for the player to read the two-dimensional code. In addition, you may make it perform the light emission display of the pattern given to the transmissive member during the display of a two-dimensional code. Further, during the display of the two-dimensional code, all the lamps provided on the front frame door 106 of the gaming table 100 and the gaming board 200 are turned off. Note that any of the lamps provided on the front frame door 106 of the gaming table 100 or the gaming board 200 may be turned on during the display of the two-dimensional code.

  Further, the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member after displaying the two-dimensional code may be turned off. Note that the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the two-dimensional code. Note that the light emission display of the pattern applied to the transmissive member may be turned off before displaying the two-dimensional code.

  Further, after the two-dimensional code is displayed, the lamps provided on the front frame door 106 of the gaming table 100 or the game board 200 may be turned off. Note that the lamps provided on the front frame door 106 of the gaming table 100 and the game board 200 may be turned off simultaneously with the display of the two-dimensional code. Note that the lamps provided on the front frame door 106 of the gaming table 100 or the game board 200 may be turned off before displaying the two-dimensional code.

  121 (a) to 121 (d) are diagrams illustrating examples of effects performed on the game board 200, and are schematic front views of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 121 (a), for example, during a special figure variation game, a pattern 703J applied to the transmissive member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side) is displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  In FIG. 121 (b), for example, during the special figure changing game, the patterns 703J and 703K applied to the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side) are displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  In FIG. 121 (c), for example, during the special figure changing game, the patterns 703J, 703K, and 703L provided on the transparent member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side) are displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  In FIG. 121 (d), for example, during the special figure changing game, patterns 703J, 703K, 703L and 703M applied to the transmissive member 703 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (player side) are displayed in a light-emitting manner.

  In this embodiment, the display mode (number of patterns, color, shape, size, brightness) of the light-transmitting transparent member during the special map variable game (may be in the normal map variable game) , At least one of the display positions and the like is different), and indicates the reliability of the special figure variable game jackpot. For example, the reliability increases in the order of FIG. 121 (a) <FIG. 121 (b) <FIG. 121 (c) <FIG. 121 (d). This suggestion of reliability may be for the variable game, or may indicate the reliability for the jackpot of the variable game after the next time.

<Appendix 1>
The present invention described above is
1.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating light to the transmission region,
The first region and the second region in the transmission region are provided with direction changing means at least,
The direction changing means is capable of changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
Since the first area is a gaming table that is capable of emitting light brighter than the second area,
A variety of performances can be provided, and a game stand that improves the fun of the game can be provided.

  In addition, there are cases where various display modes can be performed by creating bright and dark areas by light emission.

  In some cases, bright areas and dark areas are generated by light emission, so that a decoration effect can be obtained in bright areas and the visibility of game areas can be improved in dark areas. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the game from being hindered while providing the effect.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. In the game table described in
The plurality of light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The first light emitting means has a first number of light sources arranged at a first interval;
The second light emitting means has a second number of light sources arranged at a second interval,
Since the first interval is a gaming table characterized by being shorter than the second interval,
In some cases, the decoration effect can be enhanced by avoiding areas that are not desired to be bright.

The present invention also provides
3.
2. In the game table described in
The distance from the light source closest to the first region to the first region among the light sources directed to the first region is the first distance,
The distance from the light source closest to the second region to the second region among the light sources directed to the second region is the second distance,
Since the first distance is a game stand characterized by being closer than the second distance,
In some cases, the decoration effect can be enhanced by avoiding areas that are not desired to be bright.

The present invention also provides
4).
1. To 3. In the game stand of any one of these,
Of the plurality of light emitting means, a first light emitting means has a first curved surface,
Of the plurality of light emitting means, the second light emitting means has a second curved surface that includes at least a predetermined section that is larger than the curvature of the first curved surface and has the largest curvature in the second light emitting means. Because it is a game stand characterized by
In some cases, the brightness can be changed without changing the arrangement position of the light emitting units.

  In addition, even in the same decoration, the appearance may be different depending on the direction of the light emitting means.

The present invention also provides
5.
1. To 4. In the game stand of any one of these,
Since the first area has a gaming table characterized in that more direction changing means are provided than in the second area,
By reducing the direction changing means in the area where the visibility is desired, there may be a case where bright and dark areas can be sharpened.

  In addition, by changing the density of the direction changing means, there are cases where the decoration variation can be increased and the decoration effect can be enhanced.

<Appendix 2>
The present invention described above is
1.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
Image display means capable of visually recognizing an image from the front side through the transmission region;
Decorated decoration means,
A game machine equipped with
The decoration means is provided at least at a position higher than the image display means,
The image display means is capable of at least executing a variation display of a decorative pattern,
A plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating light to the transmission region,
At least a direction changing means is provided in the plurality of regions in the transmission region,
At least one of the plurality of regions is a first region;
At least one of the plurality of regions is a second region;
The direction changing means is capable of changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to at least a front side,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a fluctuating decorative design in a first display area which is a partial display area of the image display means,
At least a portion of the first region is provided on the front side of at least a portion of the first display region;
At least a part of the second region is provided on the front side of at least a part of the decoration means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
A variety of performances can be provided, and a game stand that improves the fun of the game can be provided.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. In the game table described in
The transmission region is provided with at least a third region,
The third region is a region where the direction changing means is not provided,
At least a part of the third area is provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display area.
This is a game table characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
3.
2. In the game table described in
The game area is provided with a rolling area where the game ball can roll,
At least a part of the third region is provided on the front side of at least a part of the rolling region.
This is a game table characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
4).
3. In the game table described in
At least one of the plurality of regions is a fourth region;
The fourth region is provided on the front side of at least a part of the rolling region,
This is a game table characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
5.
4). In the game table described in
Both the height and width of the first region are greater than the diameter of the game ball,
At least one of the height and width of the fourth region is smaller than the diameter of the game ball;
This is a game table characterized by that.

<Other configurations>
By the way, although it is conceivable to provide a belt-shaped substrate having a plurality of light emitting portions on the frame of the glass unit, in the present invention, the traveling direction of the light irradiated by the plurality of light emitting means having a characteristic configuration is further determined. Direction changing means for changing to the person side.

The present invention also provides:
1-1.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided in a region other than the region through which the game ball passes,
A gaming table, characterized by
1-2.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided in an area through which game balls do not pass,
A gaming table, characterized by
1-3.
1-1. In the game table described in
The area through which the game ball passes is
Around the launch rail,
Around the nail where the game ball first hits,
Start port (first special figure start port, second special figure start port, ordinary map start port (called gate or through chucker)),
Windmill (Hitball changing member)
A gaming table, characterized by including,
1-4.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means may be a gaming table characterized in that in a region through which a game ball passes, it is thinner than the diameter of the game ball and changes the traveling direction of light to the player side,
1-5.
In the gaming machine described in 1-2,
The area where the game ball does not pass is
There may be a gaming table characterized by being an area through which game balls cannot pass (liquid crystal display devices provided in the gaming area, movable objects, etc.),
1-6.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided in a region other than a device area for displaying information related to the game (for example, a region where a special-figure display device, a general-purpose display device, a holding lamp, etc. are arranged, a region where the fourth symbol is displayed). Being
In this case, the state of the game (fluctuating in design, stopped, stored on hold, high probability, big hit, right-handed period, etc.) Etc.) may be visible at all times and may be prevented from affecting the progress of the game,
Moreover, according to each above-mentioned structure,
There are cases where the game ball is made visible so as to prevent the game from being affected. In addition, there may be a case where the decoration effect of an area where the game ball does not pass (liquid crystal, movable object, etc.) can be further enhanced.

The present invention also provides:
2-1.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
There may be a gaming table characterized in that the light whose traveling direction has been changed to the player side by the direction changing means emits and displays a predetermined pattern.
2-2.
2-1. In the game table described in
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area.

The predetermined pattern is the first region;
A gaming table, characterized by
2-3.
2-1. In the game table described in
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first area is brighter than the second area.

The predetermined pattern is other than the second region,
In this case, for example, a portion that is not illuminated at all, or a portion that is slightly shining out of the pattern may be the second region,
2-4.
2-1. In the game table described in
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first region is brighter than the second region;
The predetermined pattern includes both the first region (bright portion) and the second region (a portion that is darker than the first region but is shining or not shining at all). In this case, the predetermined pattern may be displayed including the area through which the game ball passes, and the location and size of the predetermined pattern may not be selected. ,
Moreover, according to each structure mentioned above, the decoration effect may be able to be improved.

The present invention also provides
3-1.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first region is brighter than the second region;
There may be a gaming table, characterized in that the light emitting means is provided in a portion closest to the first region or the second region and a portion facing the closest portion,
3-2.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first region is brighter than the second region;
There may be a gaming machine characterized in that each of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged at equal intervals (or substantially equal intervals). In this case, the position of the pattern (first area) to be displayed and You may be able to emit light regardless of the shape,
3-3.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first region is brighter than the second region;
Each of the plurality of light emitting means may be a game table characterized by being provided along a line connecting predetermined portions (center portion, end portion, etc.) of the light emitting means,
3-4.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first region is brighter than the second region;
Each of the plurality of light emitting means may be a gaming table, which is provided in a line on the same straight line,
3-4 '.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first region is brighter than the second region;
Each of the plurality of light emitting means may be a gaming table, characterized by being provided in a plurality of rows,
3-5.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first region is brighter than the second region;
There may be a gaming table, characterized in that the distance from the plurality of light emitting means to the direction changing means can be different.
3-6.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first region is brighter than the second region;
There may be a gaming table characterized in that the brightness of the first area and the second area is variable, and in this case, the effect (for example, whether the pattern is clearly visible or not visible is a big hit May have different expectations) and may improve the decoration effect,
Moreover, according to each structure mentioned above, the decoration effect may be able to be improved.

The present invention also provides
4-1.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region;
Direction changing means for changing a traveling direction of light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side;
With
The direction changing means is provided at least in the first region and the second region of the transmission region,
The first region is brighter than the second region;
The light emitting means may be a game table, wherein a predetermined number of the light emitting means are arranged on a predetermined substrate,
4-2.
4-1. In the game table described in
The predetermined substrate is one (for example, it may be a flexible substrate).
A gaming table, characterized by
4-3.
4-1. In the game table described in
The predetermined substrate is a plurality (for example, a rigid substrate).
A gaming table, characterized by
4-4.
4-3. In the game table described in
The plurality of predetermined substrates include a first substrate and a second substrate, and the length of the first substrate and the length of the second substrate are the same (substantially the same). Can be a playground,
4-5.
4-3. In the game table described in
The plurality of predetermined substrates include a first substrate and a second substrate, and the length of the first substrate is longer than the length of the second substrate, There may be
4-6.
4-3. In the game table described in
The plurality of predetermined boards include a first board and a second board, and the length of the first board is shorter than the length of the second board. There may be
Further, according to each of the above-described configurations, the decoration effect may be enhanced if there is only one predetermined substrate, and if there are a plurality of predetermined substrates, the substrates are arranged according to the shape of the frame. In some cases, damage to components mounted on the board or the board itself may be prevented.

The present invention also provides
5-1.
4-1. In the game table described in
The connector of the board may be a game stand, which is arranged around a predetermined part of the frame member,
5-2.
5-1. In the game table described in
It is the periphery of the speaker provided in the predetermined portion, at least the door body.
A gaming table, characterized by
5-3.
5-1. In the game table described in
In some cases, the predetermined part, at least the four corners of the opening, a game table,
Moreover, according to each structure mentioned above, a connector may be able to be concentrated on a predetermined | prescribed site | part and a maintainability may be able to be improved.

The present invention also provides
6-1.
4-1. In the game table described in
Among the surfaces on which the substrate can be installed, there is a case where the predetermined surface is a gaming table characterized by not providing the substrate,
6-2.
6-1. In the game table described in
The surface on which the substrate is not provided may be a game table characterized in that the angle is a tight part.In this case, the substrate may be prevented from being damaged,
6-3.
6-1. In the game table described in
The surface on which the substrate is not provided may be a game table characterized in that a separate member (for example, a handle) is provided in the transmission region. (For example, a handle) may be prevented from being removed, and the strength of a joint between another member (for example, a handle) and a transmission region may be increased.
6-4.
6-1. In the game table described in
The portion where the substrate is not provided may be a gaming table, characterized in that it is the same color as the substrate installation surface of the portion where the substrate is provided or a color close thereto.
6-5.
6-1. In the game table described in
The portion where the substrate is not provided may be a game stand characterized by a color that reflects light (for example, white). In this case, the light emitting means is installed by reflecting the light. You may be able to emit light from the surface that is not
Moreover, according to each structure mentioned above, the breakage | damage of a permeation | transmission area | region or a board | substrate may be prevented.

The present invention also provides
7-1.
4-1. In the game table described in
The predetermined board may be a game table, characterized in that it is provided along a surface on which a board can be installed,
7-2.
7-1. In the game table described in
In some cases, the surface on which the board can be installed is a game table, which is a curved surface or a flat surface,
7-3.
7-2. In the game table described in
There may be a gaming table, characterized in that the direction of light is determined by the direction of the curved surface or plane of the surface on which the substrate can be installed,
7-4.
7-2. In the game table described in
There may be a gaming table characterized in that the brightness is different between the case where the predetermined substrate is provided on a flat surface and the case where the predetermined substrate is provided on a curved surface,
7-5.
7-1. In the game table described in
In some cases, the surface on which the substrate can be installed is a gaming table, which is provided on a support frame,
7-6.
7-1. In the game table described in
The surface on which the substrate can be installed may be a gaming table, which is provided other than the support frame,
In addition, according to each of the above-described configurations, there are cases where the brightness can be changed without changing the arrangement position of the light emitting means, and even the same decoration can be seen differently depending on the direction of the light emitting means. There is.

The present invention also provides
8-1.
4-1. In the game table described in
The light emitting means may be a game table characterized in that a plurality of predetermined numbers (two or three) are electrically connected in series to the predetermined substrate, and
In addition, according to each of the above-described configurations, when the light emitting means is damaged, the light emitting means connected in series also does not shine, so the light emitting means may be easily noticed and the maintainability may be improved. is there.

The present invention also provides
9-1.
4-1. In the game table described in
There may be a gaming table characterized by providing a member for fixing the substrate in the transmission region,
9-2.
4-1. In the game table described in
In some cases, the board may be a gaming table having a screw hole in the transmission region. In this case, when the board is bent and fixed, the position for fixing the board may be shifted. In some cases, the hole is widened (expanded in the longitudinal direction of the substrate)
9-3.
4-1. In the game table described in
There may be a gaming table characterized by having a claw portion for fixing the substrate to a support frame,
Moreover, according to each structure mentioned above, it may be possible to prevent the position of the light emitting means from being shifted, and to prevent the area to be brightened from being darkened or the area to be darkened from being brightened.

The present invention also provides
10-1.
1-1. In the game table described in
In some cases, the direction changing means may be a game stand characterized by the same shape (for example, the shape of each portion that reflects light).
10-2.
1-1. In the game table described in
There is a case where the game machine is characterized in that the shape of the direction changing means (for example, the shape of each portion that reflects light) is different for each region.
10-3.
1-1. In the game table described in
There is a case where the number of the direction changing means is a game table, which is the same regardless of the area,
10-4.
1-1. In the game table described in
There may be a gaming machine characterized in that the number of the direction changing means is different for each area. In this case, the number of the direction changing means provided in the first area is the second area. There are cases where the number of direction change means is larger (or less) than the number of direction change means, and the fact that the number of direction change means is small may include the case where the number of direction change means is zero.

The present invention also provides
11-1.
1-1. In the game table described in
The first area may be a gaming table on which a game ball on the game board does not pass, and the second area may be a game platform other than that. In some cases, it is formed continuously over a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The present invention also provides
12-1.
1-1. In the game table described in
About two light sources (first light source, second light source) that irradiate light to the specific direction changing means and the specific direction changing means,
Between the specific direction changing means and the first light source, there is provided a transmission area for allowing the player to visually recognize the symbol display means (parts not desired to be brightened such as special figure display means and lamps),
A transmission region is provided between the specific direction changing means and the second light source to allow the player to visually recognize the moving movable means for production,
There may be a gaming machine characterized in that the distance between the specific direction change means and the second light source is shorter than the distance between the specific direction change means and the first light source. In this case, the first light source Since there is a distance from the specific direction changing means, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the light from being dispersed and the special display device side from being illuminated brightly.

(Other)
In addition, the following structures may be sufficient as this invention.

    The direction changing means may be provided in a predetermined area other than the two areas of the first area and the second area in the transmission area.

    -The direction change means should just be provided in the 1st area | region even if a little, and does not need to be provided without the gap over the whole area | region.

    -The direction change means should just be provided in the 2nd area | region as much as possible, and does not need to be provided without the gap over the whole area | region.

When the direction changing means is based on a predetermined shape of the transmission area for directing the traveling direction of light toward the player side, the number of the predetermined shape, the type of the predetermined shape, the predetermined area of the transmission area The number, etc., of which a predetermined shape is applied may be arbitrarily determined in order to determine the brightness. The transmission area only needs to include an area through which the game area can be transmitted to the player. The transmission part 700 (glass unit) may be applied.

    A single transmission member (such as the transmission member 703) may be applied to the transmission region, or a plurality of transmission members (such as the transmission member 703) may be applied.

    A single glass (outer glass 705, inner glass 706, etc.) may be applied to the transmission region, or a plurality of glasses (outer glass 705, inner glass 706, etc.) may be applied.

    A single transmission member (such as the transmission member 703) may be applied to the transmission region, or a plurality of transmission members (such as the transmission member 703) may be applied.

    A combination of one or a plurality of glasses (outer glass 705, inner glass 706, etc.) and one or a plurality of transmission members (such as a transmission member 703) may be applied to the transmission region.

    One or a plurality of other transmissive members (predetermined members other than the transmissive member 703, the outer glass 705, and the inner glass 706) may be applied to the transmissive region.

    The transmission region includes one or more glasses (outer glass 705, inner glass 706, etc.), one or more transmission members (such as transmission member 703), and one or more other transmission members (such as Any combination of a plurality of combinations may be applied to a predetermined member other than the transmission member 703, the outer glass 705, and the inner glass 706).

    All the light emitting means may have the same maximum brightness that can emit light, or the same minimum brightness.

    Each of the light emitting means may have different maximum brightness that can emit light, and may have different minimum brightness.

    -All light emitting means provided around the transmissive area and emitting light toward the side surface of the transmissive area may have the same maximum brightness that can be emitted, and all the minimum brightness is the same. Also good.

    Each of the light emitting means provided around the transmissive region and emitting light toward the side surface of the transmissive region may have different maximum brightness or different minimum brightness. .

In all the embodiments, the following configuration is described.
That is, a game result display means capable of informing a game result,
On the front side of the game result display means, a transparent area facing at least the game result display means,
A plurality of light emitting means for irradiating light to the transmission region,
The first region and the second region in the transmission region are provided with direction changing means at least,
The direction changing means is capable of changing the traveling direction of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting means to the player side,
The first area is a gaming machine characterized in that light can be emitted brighter than the second area, and if this gaming machine is used, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. Can do.

  The game result display means may be a reel in a slot machine or a game board of a pachinko machine.

  The first region (bright) and the second region (dark) may have the following configurations.

    -Both a 1st area | region and a 2nd area | region may have a predetermined shape.

    -Both a 1st area | region and a 2nd area | region may be an area | region where the pattern of a predetermined shape is displayed by the light by which the advancing direction was changed by the direction change means.

    The predetermined shape described above is, for example, a predetermined character shape, a predetermined character shape, a predetermined character string shape, a predetermined numeral shape, a predetermined human shape, a predetermined human face shape, a predetermined animal shape, It may be the shape of the face of a predetermined animal, the same shape as the picture displayed by a presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 208, the decorative design display device 208, etc.) or a related shape.

    The pattern having the predetermined shape described above may be, for example, a pattern in which a predetermined pattern is applied to the predetermined shape described above, or an outline having a predetermined shape formed in a predetermined pattern.

    The position that can be placed in the transmission area of the first area may be a position that is higher than the position that can be placed in the transmission area of the second area.

      In that case, the number of the light emitting means arranged above the transmissive region may be larger than the number of the light emitting means arranged below the transmissive region, or the neighboring light emitting means arranged above the transmissive region. The interval between any two light emitting units that meet each other may be smaller than the interval between any two adjacent light emitting units that are disposed below the transmission region.

    The position that can be placed in the transmission region of the first region may be a lower position than the position that can be placed in the transmission region of the second region.

      In that case, the number of the light emitting means arranged below the transmissive region may be larger than the number of the light emitting means arranged above the transmissive region, or arranged below the transmissive region. The interval between any two adjacent light emitting units may be smaller than the interval between any two adjacent light emitting units disposed on the upper side of the transmission region.

    The position that can be placed in the transmission area of the first area may be a position that is further to the left than the position that can be placed in the transmission area of the second area.

      In that case, the number of the light emitting means arranged on the left side of the transmissive area may be larger than the number of the light emitting means arranged on the right side of the transmissive area, or adjacent to the left side of the transmissive area. The interval between any two light emitting units may be narrower than the interval between any two adjacent light emitting units disposed on the right side of the transmission region.

    The position that can be placed in the transmission area of the first area may be a position on the right side of the position that can be placed in the transmission area of the second area. At this time, the number of light emitting means arranged on the right side of the transmissive area may be larger than the number of light emitting means arranged on the left side of the transmissive area, or adjacent to the right side of the transmissive area. The interval between any two light emitting units may be narrower than the interval between any two adjacent light emitting units disposed on the left side of the transmission region.

    Even if the interval between any two adjacent light emitting means arranged closest to the first area is smaller than the interval between any two adjacent light emitting means arranged closest to the second area Good.

    The distance from the first area to the light emitting means closest to the first area is closer than the distance from the second area to the light emitting means closest to the second area. May be.

    -The number of light emitting means facing the first area may be larger than the number of light emitting means facing the second area.

    -The magnitude | size of a 1st area | region may be larger than the magnitude | size of a 2nd area | region.

    -The magnitude | size of a 1st area | region may be smaller than the magnitude | size of a 2nd area | region.

<Appendix 3>
The present invention described above is
1.
A game board with a game area;
A transmissive region provided at a front side of the game board and facing at least the game region;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
An image display means that is separate from the symbol display means and is capable of visually recognizing an image from the front side through the transmission region;
A start opening provided in the game area;
When the game ball wins at the start opening, a determination unit for determining whether or not the determination can be made;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a symbol stop mode corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a decorative symbol stop mode corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure after performing a decorative symbol variation display,
A plurality of light emitting means capable of irradiating light to the transmission region,
At least a direction changing means is provided in the plurality of regions in the transmission region,
The direction changing means is capable of changing the traveling direction of light irradiated by the plurality of light emitting means to the front side,
The size of the first region of the plurality of regions is a region larger than the size of the second region of the plurality of regions,
The image display means is capable of displaying a decorative pattern that is fluctuating in a first display area which is a part of the display area of the image display means.
Since at least a part of the first area is provided in front of at least a part of the first display area, the light-transmitting area on the front side of at least a part of the decorative pattern being changed emits light. Made it possible to
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
A variety of performances can be provided, and a game stand that improves the fun of the game can be provided.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. In the game table described in
The image display means is capable of at least performing variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The transmission region has a third region,
The third region is a region where the direction changing means is not provided,
The image display means is capable of variably displaying at least one of the plurality of decorative symbols in the first display area,
The image display means is capable of variably displaying at least one decorative design of the plurality of decorative designs in a second display region which is a partial display region of the image display means,
The first and second areas are not provided on the front side of the second display area, and the third area is provided.
This is a game table characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. In the game table described in
Since at least a part of the second area is provided in front of at least a part of the first display area, the light-transmitting area on the front side of at least a part of the decorative pattern that is changing is emitted. Made it possible to
This is a game table characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
4).
2. In the game table described in
The game area is provided with a rolling area where the game ball can roll,
The first region is not provided on the front side of the rolling region,
At least a part of the second region is provided on the front side of the rolling region,
At least a part of the third region is provided on the front side of the rolling region,
This is a game table characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
5.
1. To 4. In the game stand of any one of these,
Both the height and width of the first region are greater than the diameter of the game ball,
At least one of the height and width of the second region is smaller than the diameter of the game ball;
This is a game table characterized by that.

<Appendix 4>
The present invention described above is
1.
A game board having at least a game area;
Production means capable of executing at least production related to the game,
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of the production means are provided,
At least one presentation means of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
At least one rendering means among the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
At least one of the first effect means and the second effect means is provided with at least a transmission region that can transmit the back side,
The first effect means is provided at least in the game area,
The first rendering means is movable at least between a first position and a second position;
When the first effect means is the first position, the first effect means and the second effect means are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction in at least a part of the region,
The effect means provided with the transmission region is located on the front side of the other effect means,
A light emitting means capable of emitting at least light toward the transmission region;
The transmission region is capable of directing light emitted from the light emitting means at least forward,
The transmission region includes at least a first transmission region,
The transmission region includes at least a second transmission region,
The second transmission region is a region other than the first transmission region,
On the front side of at least a partial area of the rendering means located on the rear side, the first transmission area can emit at least light.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
A variety of performances can be provided, and a game stand that improves the fun of the game can be provided.

  In some cases, a first effect means and a second effect means can be used to produce a three-dimensional effect.

  In addition, the first effect means may be a shutter, the second effect means may be a liquid crystal display means, and the shutter comes out in front of the liquid crystal display means (the first effect means is When in the first position, the shutter may emit light on the front side of the liquid crystal display means.

  In addition, the first effect means may be a wing accessory, the second effect means may be an illumination member, and the illumination member may emit light in front of the wing accessory. In this case, for example, the illumination member may have a half mirror, and the half mirror may be used for decoration while hiding the wings. On the other hand, the wings may be displayed without being hidden. . In this case, the case where the blade accessory is in the initial position corresponds to the first position.

  In addition, the first effect means may be various kinds of accessories, the second effect means may be a glass light emitting member, and both the case where the accessory operates and the initial position is the first position. (For example, even when the first effect means is at the second position, the first effect means and the second effect means may overlap in the front-rear direction). In some cases, the glass light emission is performed by the glass light emitting member in the front to decorate.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light to at least the transmission region when the first rendering means is in the first position.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There may be a case where the light emission effect can be surely performed when the first effect means and the second effect means overlap.

  The production means having the first transmission area may be the first production means or the second production means.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. A game machine according to claim 1,
The first rendering means is provided with at least the transmission region,
The light emitting means is provided in the first rendering means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Even when the first effect means does not overlap with the second effect means, there is a case where the light emission effect using the first transmission region can be executed.

  In addition, since the relative positional relationship between the first transmission region and the light emitting means does not change, there may be a case where a light emission effect can be performed more reliably.

  In this case, for example, the light emitting means and the first effecting means may be integrated, and as an example, the light emitting means may be provided at the edge of the shutter, or may be an illumination member. .

The present invention also provides
4).
1. Or 2. A game machine according to claim 1,
The light emitting means is provided separately from the first rendering means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the first rendering means can be reduced in weight.

  Even if the first effect means is not in the first position, there may be a case where an effect using the light emitting means can be performed.

  Note that the light emitting means may not move with the movement of the first effect means.

  The light emitting means may be capable of executing at least a light emission effect for the second effect means when the first effect means is at the second position.

  In some cases, a light emission effect can be performed on the second effect means.

  In some cases, a light emission effect can be performed only for the second effect means.

The present invention also provides
5.
1. To 4. The game table according to any one of the above,
The second rendering means is a liquid crystal display means,
The liquid crystal display means can execute at least a game effect,
The first rendering means is located in front of at least a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display means when the first position is the first position;
The first effect means is capable of at least visually recognizing the display area on the back side of the first effect means by the transmission area.
The display area on the back side includes a plurality of display areas,
At least one display area of the plurality of display areas is a first display area,
At least one display area of the plurality of display areas is a second display area,
The first display area is an area located on the back side of the first transmission area,
The second display area is an area located on the back side of the second transmission area,
When the first transmission region is caused to emit light, the first display region is less visible than the second display region,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the production can be enlivened in front of the liquid crystal display means.

The present invention also provides
6).
5. A game machine according to claim 1,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of displaying at least a first image,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of displaying at least the first image when the first rendering means is in the first position;
The first transmission region is a pattern in which at least a pattern related to the first image is formed.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
When the light emission effect is performed, the display related to the first image may be provided in a three-dimensional manner with the liquid crystal display and the first transmission region.

The present invention also provides
7).
1. To 6. The game table according to any one of the above,
A plurality of the first transmission regions are provided,
By causing the light emitting means corresponding to the plurality of first transmission regions to emit light, it is possible to emit at least the first transmission region,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the production can be varied.

The present invention also provides
8).
1. To 7. The game table according to any one of the above,
The first transmission region is one in which the transmission region itself does not emit light.
This is a game table characterized by that.

<Appendix 5>
The present invention described above is
1.
A game board having at least a game area;
Production means capable of executing at least production related to the game,
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of the production means are provided,
At least one presentation means among the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
At least one rendering means among the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
At least one of the first rendering means and the second rendering means is provided with at least a transmission region,
The first effect means is provided at least in the game area,
The first rendering means is movable at least between a first position and a second position;
When the first effect means is the first position, the first effect means and the second effect means are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction in at least a part of the region,
The effect means provided with the transmission region is located on the front side of the other effect means,
An irradiating means (for example, a light emitting means 701) capable of irradiating at least light toward the transmission region;
The light irradiated to the transmission region by the irradiation means can be guided to at least the front side,
The transmission region includes at least a first transmission region,
The transmission region includes at least a second transmission region,
The second transmission region is a region other than the first transmission region,
The first transmission region is at least capable of emitting light on the front side of at least a partial region of the rendering means located on the rear side.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
A variety of performances can be provided, and a game stand that improves the fun of the game can be provided.

  In some cases, a first effect means and a second effect means can be used to produce a three-dimensional effect.

  In addition, the first effect means may be a shutter, the second effect means may be a liquid crystal display means, and the shutter comes out in front of the liquid crystal display means (the first effect means is When in the first position, the shutter may emit light on the front side of the liquid crystal display means.

  The first effect means may be a blade accessory, the second effect means may be an illumination member, and the illumination member may emit light in front of the blade accessory. In this case, for example, the illumination member may have a half mirror, and the half mirror may be used for decoration while hiding the wings. On the other hand, the wings may be displayed without being hidden. . In this case, the case where the blade accessory is in the initial position corresponds to the first position.

  In addition, the first effect means may be various kinds of accessories, the second effect means may be a glass light emitting member, and both the case where the accessory operates and the initial position is the first position. (For example, even when the first effect means is at the second position, the first effect means and the second effect means may overlap in the front-rear direction). In some cases, the glass light emission is performed by the glass light emitting member in the front to decorate.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
The irradiating means is capable of irradiating at least the transmission region when the first rendering means is at the first position.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There may be a case where the light emission effect can be surely performed when the first effect means and the second effect means overlap.

  The production means having the first transmission area may be the first production means or the second production means.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. A game machine according to claim 1,
The first rendering means is provided with at least the transmission region,
The irradiation means is provided in the first rendering means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Even when the first effect means does not overlap with the second effect means, there is a case where the light emission effect using the first transmission region can be executed.

  In addition, since the relative positional relationship between the first transmission region and the light emitting means does not change, there may be a case where a light emission effect can be performed more reliably.

  In this case, for example, the light emitting means and the first effecting means may be integrated, and as an example, the light emitting means may be provided at the edge of the shutter, or may be an illumination member. .

The present invention also provides
4).
1. Or 2. A game machine according to claim 1,
The irradiation means is provided separately from the first rendering means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the first rendering means can be reduced in weight.

  Even if the first effect means is not in the first position, there may be a case where an effect using the light emitting means can be performed.

  Note that the light emitting means may not move with the movement of the first effect means.

  The light emitting means may be capable of executing at least a light emission effect for the second effect means when the first effect means is at the second position.

  In some cases, a light emission effect can be performed on the second effect means.

  In some cases, a light emission effect can be performed only for the second effect means.

The present invention also provides
5.
1. To 4. The game table according to any one of the above,
The second rendering means is a liquid crystal display means,
The liquid crystal display means can execute at least a game effect,
The first effect means is located on the front side of at least a part of the display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display means when the first position is the first position;
The first effect means is capable of visually recognizing at least the display area on the rear side of the first effect means by the transmission area,
The display area on the rear side of the first effect means is provided with a plurality of display areas,
At least one display area of the plurality of display areas is a first display area,
At least one of the plurality of display areas is a second display area,
The first display area is an area located on the rear side of the first transmission area,
The second display area is an area located on the rear side of the second transmission area,
When the first transmission region is caused to emit light, the first display region is less visible than the second display region,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the production can be enlivened in front of the liquid crystal display means.

The present invention also provides
6).
5. A game machine according to claim 1,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of displaying at least a first image,
The liquid crystal display means is capable of displaying at least the first image when the first rendering means is in the first position;
The first transmission region is a pattern in which at least a pattern related to the first image is formed.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
When the light emission effect is performed, the display related to the first image may be provided in a three-dimensional manner with the liquid crystal display and the first transmission region.

The present invention also provides
7).
1. To 6. The game table according to any one of the above,
A plurality of the first transmission regions are provided,
By irradiating light by the irradiation means corresponding to a plurality of the first transmission regions, it is possible to emit at least the first transmission region,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the production can be varied.

The present invention also provides
8).
1. To 7. The game table according to any one of the above,
The transmissive region is non-self-luminous,
This is a game table characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
A.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
The second rendering means is located in front of the first rendering means,
The second rendering means is provided with at least the transmission region,
The light emitting means is capable of causing at least a part of the first transmission region to emit light when the first rendering means is in the second position.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
It may be possible to produce the first effect means and the second effect means independently.

The present invention also provides
A '.
A. A game machine according to claim 1,
The second rendering means makes the first rendering means at least difficult to visually recognize when the first rendering means is in the first position.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Since the presence of the first effect means can be diminished by the light emission effect of the first transmission region, there is a case where an impact can be given when the first effect means moves.

The present invention also provides
B.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
The second rendering means is a transmissive member (for example, a glass member) that is at least permeable through the game area.
When the first effect means is in the first position, the entire area overlaps with the second effect means,
When the first effect means is in the second position, the entire area overlaps with the second effect means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Regardless of the position of the first effect means, there may be a case where a related effect can be performed.

The present invention also provides
C.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
The rendering means provided with the transmissive region includes a plurality of the first transmissive regions spaced at least in the front-rear direction,
The plurality of first transmission regions are formed with at least patterns associated with each other.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There may be a case where a stereoscopic effect can be performed only by the effect means provided with the first transmission region.

The present invention also provides
C '.
C. A game machine according to claim 1,
The effect means provided with the transmissive area is a transmissive member (for example, a glass member) capable of transmitting at least the game area.
A plurality of the transmissive members are provided in the front-rear direction,
At least one transmission member of the plurality of transmission members is a first transmission member,
At least one transmission member of the plurality of transmission members is a second transmission member,
The first transmission member is formed with the first transmission region to be a first pattern,
The second transmission member is formed with the first transmission region to be a second pattern,
The first pattern and the second pattern are at least related patterns,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where a pattern can be produced in three dimensions. For example, a composite display may be possible.

The present invention also provides
D.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
The effect means provided with the transmissive area is a transmissive member (for example, a glass member) capable of transmitting at least the game area.
Liquid crystal display means capable of performing at least effect display in the gaming area,
The first position is a front side of at least a part of the display area of the display area in the liquid crystal display means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases in which an effect in three stages of liquid crystal display means, movable body, and glass emission is possible.

(Other)
In addition, the following structures may be sufficient as this invention.

    -When a pattern is formed by the first transmission region, it may be a pattern related to the other effect means or a pattern not related to it. The related display may be combined with the production means (for example, a liquid crystal display).

    It is also possible to employ presentation means having a plurality of first transmission areas in the front-rear direction. In this case, if the first transmission region overlaps in the front-rear direction, a three-dimensional effect may be made to stand out. Further, the first transmission region may not overlap in the front-rear direction. In this case, it may be possible to produce a pattern with a sense of depth.

    In the embodiment, the light is changed as much as possible toward the front side that is the player side, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if direction change means (such as a cut) that reduces the amount of light directed forward is provided, the pattern that becomes the first transmission region of the portion may be displayed lightly. That is, there may be a case where a change in the effect can be given by color shading or the like (for example, a three-dimensional image can be displayed without the first transmission region in the front-rear direction).

    ・ Furthermore, for example, the amount of light by the light emitting means (sometimes referred to as irradiation means) can be adjusted, and the portion that the player wants to show can be reduced in light amount and the pattern can be made thinner. is there. For example, if the pattern is darkened by increasing the amount of light on the front side of the fourth pattern or pre-read hold display etc., the player may be noticed conversely, and conversely if the amount of light is decreased and made thinner In some cases, the performance can be performed without impeding visibility.

    The pattern shading can be set as appropriate according to the combination of the size, direction, density (fineness) of the cut, distance from the light emitting means (light source), and the like.

    The first transparent area may be any picture, character, symbol, photograph, pattern, or the like.

    It is also possible for each light emitting means to define a first transmissive region that is a responsible region for raising a pattern. For example, the first transmission region existing between one light emitting means and another light emitting means forms a cut in a direction in which light from both light emitting means can be changed toward the front side. Also good. Moreover, the position of the light emitting means can also be adopted from a position other than the side surface side in accordance with the cutting direction.

    -You may provide a 1st transmissive area | region so that a some pattern may appear in a common area | region. The first pattern of the plurality of patterns corresponds to light emission from the first direction, and the second pattern of the plurality of patterns has a different cutting direction corresponding to light emission from the second direction. In some cases, the pattern can be displayed individually.

    -As for the shutter that is a production movable body that covers the liquid crystal display means, it is not necessary to cover all of the liquid crystal display means, or to cover the entire display area of the liquid crystal display means and to cover a part of the outside. Good. In the latter case, it may be possible to produce an effect in a range larger than the display area.

    -Even if the 1st production | presentation means is not in the 1st position, the 1st transmission area can also be used for production.

    -In the production | presentation means provided with the some 1st transmissive area | region in the front-back direction, a related pattern may be produced and it is also possible to produce different productions by shifting timing. Even if the timing is shifted, a related effect may be performed (for example, a step-up notice is an example of a related effect).

    -Display devices controlled by the main control means such as special symbol display devices and general-purpose display devices are outside the game area (visible by the transmissive member and do not emit glass or emit glass). Can also be arranged in a region where the effect is small.

    -The structure which the direction means which gave the 1st permeation | transmission area | region may be located in the back side rather than the other direction means may be sufficient. For example, if the configuration is such that another movable body moves before the shutter (the shutter is a light emitting effect), the movement of the movable body may be more conspicuous.

    -Both the 1st production | presentation means and the 2nd production means may have the structure which can have a 1st transmission area and can perform a light emission production | presentation.

-In above-mentioned embodiment, although the 1st transmission region was comprised by cut, it is not limited to this. For example, the structure which affixes a photographic film, printed matter, an image, etc. on a glass surface and makes it emit light there may be sufficient. Also,
A structure may be employed in which light scattering particles or bubbles that reflect the irradiated light are provided inside a transmissive member such as glass or transparent resin, thereby reflecting the light and emitting light.

    In addition, if the glass or transparent resin in this case includes a light diffusing agent, the light emission effect may be further enhanced. In addition, adoption of the transparent member containing this light diffusing agent is applicable to any of the above-described embodiments. Furthermore, it is also possible to apply light to a transparent game board and emit light from the rear.

    -Even if a transparent game board is used and light is emitted from the rear, the pattern forming the first transmissive region is floating, which can be used.

    In the embodiment, the light emitting unit is configured to emit light from the lateral direction with respect to the first transmission region, but may be configured to emit light from behind. For example, a pattern can be raised from behind by providing a first transmissive region on the transparent game board.

<Appendix 6>
The present invention described above is
1.
A game board (eg, game board 200) provided with at least a game area (eg, game area 124);
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least display;
Transmission means (for example, transmission member 703) provided at a position facing at least the display means;
A game machine equipped with
Irradiating means (for example, light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G and 702H) capable of at least irradiating light to the transmitting means,
The transmitting means is provided with at least light emitting means (for example, lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, 703de, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The light emitting means is capable of at least guiding the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a decorative design, a hold display, an effect display),
The light emitting means is provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting at least when the first condition is satisfied,
The light emitting means does not emit light at least when the second condition is satisfied,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Various productions can be performed.

  In addition, there are cases where various effects can be performed.

  Further, by making the display difficult to see from the player, the player's attention may be directed to the display.

  The display means may be a decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal, reel, 7-segment, etc.), an image display device (liquid crystal, etc.), or the like.

  The light emitting means may be Delaglass, a concave portion by lens cutting, a convex portion by printing, or the like.

  The first display includes a decorative symbol, a hold display, an effect display (an effect display that suggests the reliability of the change, a prefetch effect display that indicates the reliability of the change after the next time, and a reliability (the change or the next or later In some cases, the display is an indication that does not suggest the reliability of variation).

  The light emitting means may be one that at least guides the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side by reflection, and at least guides the light irradiated by the irradiation means by refraction to the front side.

  The transmission means may be provided on the front side of the game board.

  If the second condition is satisfied while the first condition is satisfied, the second condition may be prioritized.

  Note that when the second condition is satisfied while the first condition is satisfied, the first condition may be prioritized.

The present invention also provides:
2.
1. In the game table described in
The light emitting means emits non-self-luminous light.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There may be a variety of effects.

  Further, by making the display difficult to see from the player, the player's attention may be directed to the display.

  Note that “the non-self-luminous light emission by the light emitting means” may indicate that the light emitting means itself does not emit light. In addition, “the non-self-luminous light emission by the light emitting unit” may indicate that the irradiation unit is not provided with the irradiation unit.

The present invention also provides:
3.
1. Or 2. In the game table described in
The light emitting means is capable of emitting at least light when irradiated by the irradiation means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There may be a variety of effects.

  Further, by making the display difficult to see from the player, the player's attention may be directed to the display.

The present invention also provides:
4).
1. To 3. In the game stand of any one of these,
The light emitting means includes at least first light emitting means (for example, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb, 703v),
The light emitting means includes at least second light emitting means (for example, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb, 703u),
The first light emitting means is different from the second light emitting means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where more various effects can be performed.

  Note that the first light emitting means may be displayed in the first mode.

  Note that the second light emitting means may be displayed in the second mode.

  The first aspect may be different from the second aspect.

  Further, the first aspect may be the same as the second aspect.

The present invention also provides:
5.
1. To 4. In the game stand of any one of these,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a second display,
The light emitting means is not provided at least on the front side of the second display.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
By making the second display clear, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the display.

  In addition, there is a case where information important to the player can be constantly confirmed to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  The second display may be the fourth symbol, hold (such as those provided around the image display device or hold of the special symbol display device), special symbol display means, decorative symbol, effect display, or the like. .

The present invention also provides
A.
A game board with a game area;
Display means provided on the game board and capable of executing at least a plurality of displays;
A transmission means provided on the front side of the game board and facing at least the display means;
A game machine equipped with
An irradiation unit capable of at least irradiating light to the transmission unit;
The transmitting means is provided with at least a light emitting means,
The light emitting means guides at least the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The plurality of displays includes a first display,
The first light emitting means is provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display,
The light emitting means emits light when the first condition is satisfied,
The light emitting means does not emit light when the second condition is satisfied,
The light emitting means emits light when the second condition is satisfied and the third condition is satisfied.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
By making the display invisible to the player, the player's attention may be directed to the display.

The present invention also provides
B.
1. In the game table described in
The irradiation means includes a first irradiation means,
The irradiation means includes a second irradiation means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means,
The light emitting means includes a second light emitting means,
The first light emitting means emits light by irradiation with the first irradiation means (for example, an LED which is a light source arranged in a vertical direction when viewed from the player)
The second light emitting means does not emit light when irradiated by the first irradiation means,
The second light emitting means emits light by irradiation with the second irradiation means (for example, an LED which is a light source arranged in the left-right direction when viewed from the player),
The first light emitting means does not emit light when irradiated by the second irradiation means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where variations in production can be increased.

  The first light emitting means may be capable of emitting light by irradiation with the second irradiation means.

  The second light emitting means may be capable of emitting light by irradiation with the first irradiation means.

The present invention also provides
C.
1. In the game table described in
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means,
The light emitting means includes a second light emitting means,
At least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means is provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
By providing a case in which the display is difficult to see from the player, the player's attention may be directed to the display.

  Note that the light emitting means of both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display.

  The other light emitting means of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may not be provided on the front side of at least a part of the first display.

  One and the other of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be reversed.

The present invention also provides
D.
4). In the game table described in
At least a part of the light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means) is not provided on the front side of an area (for example, a game area) through which a game ball passes,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the game ball is made visible so as to prevent the game from being affected.

  The area where the game ball passes is around the launch rail, around the nail where the game ball hits first, start port (first special figure start port, second special figure start port, ordinary map start port (gate and through chucker) ), Windmill (hitball changing member), and the like.

  Note that all of the light emitting means may not be provided on the front side of the region through which the game ball passes.

  The light emitting means may be provided in front of the area through which the game ball can pass. In this case, the width of the light emission area may be shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and the width of the light emission area may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. May be shortened. Further, it may be longer than the diameter of the game ball.

The present invention also provides
D1.
4). In the game table described in
At least a part of the light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means) is not provided on the front side of an area (for example, a game area) through which a game ball passes,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the game ball is made visible so as to prevent the game from being affected.

The present invention also provides
D2.
4). In the game table described in
At least a part of the light-emitting means (for example, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means) is not provided on the front side of an area (for example, a game area) through which a game ball passes,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the game ball is made visible so as to prevent the game from being affected.

The present invention also provides
D3.
1. In the game table described in
The light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is not provided on the front side of a region (for example, a game region) through which a game ball passes,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the game ball is made visible so as to prevent the game from being affected.

The present invention also provides
D4.
1. In the game table described in
The light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and at least one light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means is not provided at least in part on the front side of an area (for example, a game area) through which a game ball passes. Suppose,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the game ball is made visible so as to prevent the game from being affected.

The present invention also provides
D5.
1. In the game table described in
The light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and at least one light emitting means of the plurality of light emitting means is not provided at least in part on the front side of an area (for example, a game area) through which a game ball passes. Shall be
At least one other light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means is all provided on the front side of an area (for example, a game area) through which a game ball passes,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There are cases where the game ball is made visible so as to prevent the game from being affected.

The present invention also provides
E.
4). In the game table described in
At least a part of the light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means) is provided in front of an area through which a game ball does not pass (for example, a region other than the game area or an area within the game area where the game ball cannot pass) Suppose,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the decoration effect of an area (such as a liquid crystal or a movable object) through which a game ball does not pass can be further enhanced.

  The area where the game ball does not pass may be an area where the game ball cannot pass. The region through which the game ball does not pass may be, for example, around the liquid crystal (liquid crystal or a movable object arranged around the liquid crystal).

  In addition, you may make it provide all the 1st light emission means in the front side of the area | region where a game ball does not pass.

  It should be noted that at least a part of the first light emitting means may not be provided on the front side of the area where the game ball does not pass.

  It should be noted that not all of the first light emitting means may be provided on the front side of the area where the game ball does not pass.

The present invention also provides
E1.
4). In the game table described in
At least a part of the light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means) is provided in front of an area where the game ball does not pass (for example, other than the game area or an area in the game area where the game ball cannot pass). Suppose,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the decoration effect of an area (such as a liquid crystal or a movable object) through which a game ball does not pass can be further enhanced.

The present invention also provides
E2.
4). In the game table described in
The light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means) are provided in front of an area through which the game ball does not pass (for example, other than the game area, or an area within the game area where the game ball cannot pass). ) At least a part of
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the decoration effect of an area (such as a liquid crystal or a movable object) through which a game ball does not pass can be further enhanced.

The present invention also provides
E3.
1. In the game table described in
The light-emitting means includes a plurality of light-emitting means, and the plurality of light-emitting elements are provided in front of an area through which a game ball does not pass (for example, a non-game area or an area in the game area where the game ball cannot pass). Provided at least part of the means,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the decoration effect of an area (such as a liquid crystal or a movable object) through which a game ball does not pass can be further enhanced.

The present invention also provides
E4.
1. In the game table described in
The light-emitting means includes a plurality of light-emitting means, and at least one light-emitting means of the plurality of light-emitting means is an area through which a game ball does not pass (for example, a non-game area or a game ball in a game area). At least a part of the front side)
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the decoration effect of an area (such as a liquid crystal or a movable object) through which a game ball does not pass can be further enhanced.

The present invention also provides
E5.
1. In the game table described in
The light-emitting means includes a plurality of light-emitting means, and at least one light-emitting means of the plurality of light-emitting means is an area through which a game ball does not pass (for example, a non-game area or a game ball in a game area). At least part of the front side of the area that cannot pass)
At least one other light-emitting means of the plurality of light-emitting means is entirely disposed in front of an area through which the game ball does not pass (for example, other than the game area, or an area within the game area where the game ball cannot pass). Not provided,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the decoration effect of an area (such as a liquid crystal or a movable object) through which a game ball does not pass can be further enhanced.

The present invention also provides
F.
1. In the game table described in
Even if it is a specific area even if the game ball does not pass, no light emitting means is provided on the front side of at least a part of the specific area.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Make the game state visible to the player (for example, whether the symbol is changing, stopped, stored on hold, high probability, big hit, right-handed period, etc.) May be prevented.

  The specific area may be a special-figure display device, a general-purpose display device, an area in which a holding lamp is arranged, a fourth symbol, or the like.

  Note that light emitting means may be provided on at least a part of the front side of the special figure display device.

  A light emitting means may be provided on at least a part of the front display device.

  A light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the holding lamp (main).

  The light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the fourth pattern.

  Note that light emitting means may be provided on the front side of at least a part of the specific region.

  A certain light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means described in 4) is not provided, but another light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means described in 4) is provided in the specific region. It may be provided on some front sides.

<Others>
(1) Examples of the second condition (i) While the design is changing, the light emitting means can emit at least light emission (for example, light emission display of the pattern on the transmission part, glass light emission). There is a case where light emission due to is not performed at least. This symbol may be a symbol of special symbol display means. Note that at least light emission by the light emitting means can be executed while the symbol is stopped, but there are cases where at least light emission by the glass light emitting means is not performed while the symbol is changing.

  (Ii) Light emission by the light emission means can be executed during the decorative symbol variation display, but light emission by the light emission means may not be performed during the decoration symbol stop display. The decorative symbol display means may be different from the image display means (for example, reel or segment display). Light emission by the light emitting means can be executed during the decorative symbol stop display, but light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed during the decorative symbol variation display.

  (Iii) Light emission by the light emission means can be executed during the pre-reading effect, but light emission by the light emission means may not be performed otherwise. Note that light emission by the light emitting unit is not performed during the pre-reading effect, but light emission by the light emitting unit may be executable otherwise.

(Iv) Light emission by the light emitting means can be executed in a certain gaming state, but light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed in another gaming state.
For example, light emission by the light emission means can be executed when the special figure is highly accurate, but light emission by the light emission means may not be executed when the special figure is low accuracy. Note that light emission by the light emission means can be executed when the special figure is less accurate, but light emission by the light emission means may not be performed when the special figure is highly accurate.
・ In addition, examples of other gaming states include high figure accuracy (during electric support) / normal figure low probability (during non-electric support), latent probability change (special figure high accuracy normal figure low accuracy) / small hit (special figure) Low probability, low accuracy), during big hit / normal game (when other than big hit), probability change (probability change after end of big hit with balls) / sudden change (probability change after end of big hit without balls), In each of these combinations, one may execute light emission by the light emitting means, and the other may not emit light by the light emitting means. Even in gaming states other than these examples, one may be able to execute light emission by the light emitting means, and the other may not emit light by the light emitting means.

(V) Light emission by the light emission means can be executed during the demonstration production (hereinafter, demonstration production), but light emission by the light emission means may not be performed otherwise. Light emission by the light emission means is not performed during the demonstration performance, but light emission by the light emission means may be executable otherwise. Further, light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed after the symbol is stopped (or immediately after) until the demonstration effect is started, and light emission by the light emitting means may be executed otherwise. It should be noted that light emission by the light emission means can be executed after the demonstration is stopped (or immediately after) until the demonstration effect is started, and otherwise light emission by the light emission means may not be performed.
The demonstration direction is
This is an effect that is executed when the next symbol variation display does not start until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation display ends. For example, those that simply perform simulated variation of symbol variation display, those that display the title of the game table, effects that display the characteristics of the game table by displaying a predetermined character, etc., lamp effects accompanying these effects, audio This is the case for production. The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a demo flag, and when the demo flag is set to ON, the first sub-control unit 400 sends a decorative symbol display device to the second sub-control unit 500. Instruct 208 to display a demonstration effect. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a demonstration screen is displayed. The demonstration effect ends with a predetermined opportunity. For example, the process is terminated when there is a new winning at the special figure starting port. As the demonstration performance ends, the demo flag is set off.

(Vi) Light emission by the light emitting means can be performed while the effect moving means is stopped, but light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed during the operation of the effect moving means.
The effect moving means may be image display means.
The effect moving means may be a decorative symbol display means.
-While the effect moving means is stopped, the light emitting means does not emit light, but during the operation of the effect moving means, light emission by the light emitting means may be executed. In some cases, the light emitting means may emit light while the effect moving means is stopped or operating, and light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed while the effect moving means is stopped or operating.

(Vii) Light emission by the light emission means is not performed during movement of the hold display, and light emission by the light emission means may be executable otherwise.
・ At the beginning of symbol fluctuation, the hold display is increased / decreased or moved. In that case, light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed.
In addition, light emission by the light emission means can be executed while the hold display is moving, and light emission by the light emission means may not be performed at other times.

(Viii) The user setting screen may not emit light by the light emitting means.
-During the user setting screen (volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, etc.), the light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed.
-During the user setting screen (volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, etc.), there is a case where the irradiation means does not irradiate the transmission means with light.

(2) Display enclosed by light emitting means (for example, first light emitting means of 4) (i) The light emitting means may surround at least a part of the decorative design.
In the above-described embodiment, three decorative symbols are displayed, and the light emitting unit may surround at least a part of one or more decorative symbols.
In addition, the light emitting means may surround at least a part of one decorative design or the entire one decorative design.
In addition, only a part of a plurality (two or three in the case of the above-described embodiment) of the decorative symbols, or all of a plurality (two or three in the case of the above-mentioned) of the decorative symbols are light emitting means. May be at least enclosed.
Note that a part or all of the display other than the decorative design may be enclosed together with a part or all of the decorative design.
-When the light emitting means surrounds the decorative symbol display, other displays may not be surrounded by the light emitting means.

(Ii) The light emitting unit may surround at least a part of the hold display (for example, icon).
In the above-described embodiment, at least a part of the hold display is surrounded by the light emitting means as one of the prefetch effects.
-Note that a hold display may be enclosed as an effect of the change.
-In the above-mentioned Example, a maximum of four hold displays are displayed, and a light emission means may surround a part of at least one hold display.
Note that the light emitting means may surround at least a part of one hold display or all of the one hold display.
-Note that only a part of a plurality of hold indications (two, three, or four in the case of the above-described embodiment) or a plurality of hold points (two, three, or four in the case of the above-described embodiment) The light emitting means may surround at least the entire display.
-Part or all of the display other than the hold display may be enclosed together with some or all of the hold display.
-When the light emitting means surrounds the hold display, other displays may not be surrounded by the light emitting means.
-When one hold is enclosed, the reliability of the hold display surrounded by the light emitting means may be suggested, and the reliability of the hold display other than the enclosed hold is suggested. (For example, the second hold display is surrounded by the light emitting means, but actually indicates the reliability of the third hold ...).
-When multiple holds are enclosed, the reliability of the hold display surrounded by the light emitting means may be suggested, and the reliability of the hold display other than the enclosed hold is suggested. There may be (for example, the second and third hold are enclosed, but in fact it suggests the reliability of the first hold ...).

(Iii) The light emitting means may surround at least a part of the effect display.
The light emitting unit may surround at least a part of at least one of the plurality of effect displays.
Note that the light emitting means may surround at least a part of one effect display or the entire one effect display.
Note that the light emitting means may surround at least a part of the plurality of effect displays or all of the plurality of effect displays.
Note that a part or all of the display other than the effect display may be enclosed together with a part or all of the effect display.
-When the light emitting unit surrounds the effect display, the other display may not be surrounded by the light emitting unit.
-All three effect displays of the change effect / prefetch effect / reliability effect may be surrounded by light emitting means.
-At least one or two of the three effects of the change effect / prefetch effect / reliability effect may be surrounded by the light emitting means.
Of the three effects of the change effect / prefetch effect / the effect that does not indicate reliability, only the effect of the change may be surrounded by the light emitting means, and the other effects may not be surrounded by the light emitting means.
-Only the pre-reading effects of the three effects of the variation / prefetching effects / effects that do not indicate reliability may be surrounded by the light emitting means, and the other effects may not be surrounded by the light emitting means.
Of the three effects of the variation / prefetching effect / the effect that does not indicate the reliability, only the effect that does not indicate the reliability may be surrounded by the light emitting means, and the other effects may not be surrounded by the light emitting means.
-When the light emitting unit surrounds the effect display, the other display may not be surrounded by the light emitting unit.

(3) Display hidden by light emitting means (for example, first light emitting means of 4.) (i) The light emitting means may hide at least a part of the decorative design.
In the above-described embodiment, three decorative symbols are displayed, and the light emitting unit may hide at least a part of one or more decorative symbols.
In addition, the light emitting means may hide at least part of one decorative design or all of one decorative design.
In addition, only a part of a plurality (two or three in the case of the above-described embodiment) of the decorative symbols, or all of a plurality (two or three in the case of the above-mentioned) of the decorative symbols are light emitting means. May be at least hidden.
-Part or all of the display other than the decorative design may be hidden together with part or all of the decorative design.
-When the light emitting means is hiding the decorative symbol display, the other display may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
-A part of the decorative design is surrounded by the light emitting means and a part is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, a part of the first decorative design is surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of the second decorative design is May be hidden by the light emitting means).
・ A part of one display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of another display is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, the entire first decorative design is enclosed, and a part of the second decorative design emits light). (Hidden by means).

(Ii) The light emitting unit may hide at least a part of the hold display (for example, icon).
In the embodiment described above, at least a part of the hold display is hidden by the light emitting means as one of the prefetch effects.
-Note that the hold display may be hidden as an effect of the change.
-In the above-mentioned Example, a maximum of four hold displays are displayed, and a light emission means may hide a part of at least one hold display.
Note that the light emitting unit may at least hide only a part of one hold display or all of one hold display.
-Note that only a part of a plurality of hold indications (two, three, or four in the case of the above-described embodiment) or a plurality of hold points (two, three, or four in the case of the above-described embodiment) The entire display may be hidden at least by the light emitting means.
-Part or all of the display other than the hold display may be hidden together with part or all of the hold display.
-When the light emitting means is hiding the hold display, the other display may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
-If one hold is hidden, the reliability of the hold display hidden by the light emitting means may be suggested, and the reliability of the hold display other than the hidden hold is suggested. (For example, the second hold indication is hidden by the light emitting means, but actually suggests the reliability of the third hold ...).
-When multiple holds are hidden, the reliability of the hold display hidden by the light emitting means may be suggested, and the reliability of the hold display other than the hidden hold is suggested. There may be (for example, the second and third holds are hidden, but actually suggests the reliability of the first hold ...).
A part of the hold display is surrounded by the light emitting means and a part is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, a part of the first hold display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of the second hold display is May be hidden by the light emitting means).
・ A part of one display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of another display is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, the entire first holding display is surrounded, and a part of the second holding display is lighted). (Hidden by means).

(Iii) The light emitting means may hide at least a part of the effect display.
The light emitting unit may hide at least a part of at least one of the plurality of effect displays.
Note that the light emitting unit may hide at least part of one effect display or all of the one effect display.
In addition, the light emitting unit may hide at least part of the plurality of effect displays or all of the plurality of effect displays.
-Part or all of the display other than the effect display may be hidden together with part or all of the effect display.
-When the light emitting unit is hiding the effect display, the other display may not be hidden by the light emitting unit.
-All three effect displays of the change effect / prefetch effect / the effect not showing the reliability may be hidden by the light emitting means.
-At least one or two of the three effects of the change effect / prefetch effect / reliability effect may be hidden by the light emitting means.
Of the three effects of the variation / prefetching / representation that does not indicate reliability, only the variation effect may be hidden by the light emitting means, and the other effects may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
-Only the pre-reading effects of the three effects of the change / prefetching effects / effects that do not indicate the reliability may be hidden by the light emitting means, and the other effects may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
Of the three effects of the change effect / prefetch effect / the effect that does not indicate the reliability, only the effect that does not indicate the reliability may be hidden by the light emitting means, and the other effects may not be hidden by the light emitting means.
-When the light emitting unit is hiding the effect display, the other display may not be hidden by the light emitting unit.
-A part of the effect display is surrounded by the light emitting means and a part is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, a part of the first effect display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and a part of the second effect display is May be hidden by the light emitting means).
-All of one display is surrounded by the light emitting means, and part of another one display is hidden by the light emitting means (for example, the entire first effect display is surrounded, and a part of the second effect display is lighted) (Hidden by means).

(4) Second light emitting means (i) The shape of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means The shapes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be the same or different.

(Ii) The size of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means The size of the first light emitting means and the size of the second light emitting means may be the same or different. The first light emitting means may be larger than the second light emitting means, and the first light emitting means may be smaller than the second light emitting means.

(Iii) Light emission timing of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means The light emission timing of the first light emitting means and the light emission timing of the second light emitting means may be the same or different. The light emission timing of the first light emitting means may be earlier than the light emission timing of the second light emitting means, and the light emission timing of the first light emitting means may be later than the light emission timing of the second light emitting means.

(Iv) About the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means-The first light-emitting means can emit at least light by light from the first irradiation means (for example, an LED that irradiates from the vertical direction). The light emitting means is capable of emitting at least light by light from a second irradiation means (for example, an LED that emits light from the left-right direction).
-During the light emission of the first light emitting means, the second light emitting means may not emit light.
-You may make it a 2nd light emission means light-emit during the light emission of a 1st light emission means.
The same applies to the case where the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means are reversed.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may emit light at the same time.

(V) The colors of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, and the colors of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be the same or different.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may have the same shape and different colors.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have the same shape and the same color.
The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may have different shapes and the same color.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may have different shapes and different colors.

(5) Second display (i) The second display may be provided at a position that is not hidden by at least the light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means of 4).
Note that the second display may be provided at a position that is not hidden only by the light emitting means.

(Ii) In the case of a plurality of light emitting areas • The second display is provided at a position that is not at least hidden by at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means.
The second display is provided at a position that is not hidden by at least one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means.
-The 2nd display may be provided in the position which is not hidden by the light emission means of both the 1st light emission means and the 2nd light emission means.
In addition, it may be provided at a position that is not hidden by the other light emitting means, or may be provided at a position that is hidden.
The second display may be provided at a position surrounded by at least one light emitting means, or may be provided at a position not surrounded by one light emitting means.
Note that the second display may be provided at a position surrounded by at least the other light emitting means, or may be provided at a position not surrounded by the other light emitting means.

(Iii) About a plurality of light emitting means (three or more light emitting means) The second display is provided at a position at least not hidden by the plurality of light emitting means.
The second display is provided at a position that is not hidden by at least one of the light emitting means.
The second display is provided at a position that is not hidden by at least one of the plurality of light emitting means.
-The 2nd display is provided in the position which is not hidden by all the light emission means of several light emission means.
The second display may be provided at a position hidden by light emitting means other than at least one light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means, or may be provided at a position not hidden.
The second display may be provided at a position hidden by at least one of the plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means different from the hidden light emitting means). It does not have to be.

  The second display may be provided at a position surrounded by at least one or more of the plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means different from the hidden light emitting means). It does not have to be.

(6) Third condition (i) When the second condition is satisfied, if the third condition is satisfied, light emission by the light emitting means can be executed. Even in the case where the light emission by the light emitting means is not performed, the light emission by the light emitting means may be executable.
・ For example, when a symbol (decorative symbol) stops ((1) (i) or (1) (ii)), the light emission means usually does not emit light. In some cases, light emission by the light emitting means can be executed even during stop display).
In addition, when the second condition is satisfied, light emission by the light emitting unit may not be performed even when the third condition is satisfied.

(Ii) If the third condition is satisfied while the second condition is not satisfied, light emission by the light emitting means can be executed.
In addition, when the third condition is satisfied while the second condition is not satisfied, light emission by the light emitting unit may not be performed.

(7) Light emission by the light emitting means as an effect (i) Light emission by the light emitting means as an effect of the change ・ After the start of the change (or immediately after or simultaneously), the light emission by the light emitting means may be started. Good.
The light emission by the light emitting means may be turned off after the fluctuation stops (or immediately after or simultaneously).
Note that the light emission by the light emitting means may be continued even after the change is completed.
Note that the light emission by the light emitting means may be turned off after the next fluctuation starts (or immediately after or simultaneously).

(Ii) The light emission by the light emitting means may be continued until the fluctuation of the light emission by the light emitting means as the pre-reading effect during the normal game and the pre-holding fluctuation starts. Further, the light emission by the light emitting means may be continued until the pre-reading pending change is completed.
-The light emission by the light emitting means may be executed every time the symbol stop display (special symbol or decorative symbol) is started until the pre-read hold fluctuation starts (for example, the light emission means emits light when the symbol is stopped). .
-Light emission by the light emitting means may be performed every time the symbol variation display (special or decorative symbol) is started until the pre-reading pending variation starts (for example, by the light emitting means at the start of symbol variation) Light is emitted).
-Light emission by the light emitting means may be executed during the pattern change until the pre-reading hold change starts (the timing at which the light emission by the light emitting means is executed is arbitrary if the pattern is changing).
It should be noted that light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed until the pre-reading pending change starts.

(Iii) Light emission by the light emitting means as an effect during a big hit / When light emission by the light emitting means is performed as a pre-reading effect during a big hit, from the start of light emission by the light emitting means in a specific round until the end of the specific round During this period, the light emission by the light emission means may be continued, the light emission by the light emission means may be continued until the big hit ends, or the pre-reading fluctuation start (or end, or a specific timing during the fluctuation) The light emission by the light emitting means may be continued until after (or immediately after or simultaneously).
Note that light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed during the pre-reading effect during the big hit, and light emission by the light emitting means may be performed at other timings.
Note that at the start or end of the big hit, light emission by the light emitting means may not be performed, and light emission by the light emitting means may be executable.
-During a big hit, light emission by the light emitting means may be performed at a position that does not hide (or does not surround) a specific area (for example, an attacker), and light emission by the light emitting means may be performed at an arbitrary position .

(Iv) Light emission / demonstration by light emitting means as an effect that does not imply reliability (lighting of game console titles (for example, CR Yoshimune), manufacturer name, characters, patterns, etc.) May be performed.
-You may light-emit by a light emission means as a decoration during the change of a pattern, or a stop.
-Light emission by the light emitting means may be performed as a decoration during the big hit.

(V) Depending on the color and shape of the light emitted by the light emitting means, the size of the region, and the color of the light emitted by the light emitting means, the reliability of the fluctuation or the fluctuation after the next time may be suggested.
-Depending on the color of light emitted by the light emitting means, the number of jackpots, number of balls played, gaming status (for example, electric support / non-electric support, probability variation / non-accuracy variation), error status, status of detecting fraud, etc. May be.
-Depending on the shape of the light emitted by the light emitting means, the reliability of the fluctuation or the fluctuation after the next time may be suggested.
-Depending on the shape of the light emitted by the light emitting means, notification of the number of big hits, the number of balls played, the gaming state (for example, electric support / non-electric support, probability change / non-accuracy change), error status, illegal detection status, etc. May be.
-Depending on the size of the light emission region by the light emitting means, the reliability of the fluctuation or the fluctuation after the next time may be suggested.
-Depending on the size of the light emitting area by the light emitting means, notification of the number of big hits, number of balls, gaming status (for example, electric support / non-electric support, probability variation / non-accuracy variation), error status, fraud detection status, etc. It may be a thing.

(Vi) Light emission period of light emission by the light emitting means / between a specific timing after the power is turned on (for example, after the initial operation of the movable body) and power interruption (power interruption due to a power failure, power off, etc.) The light emission by the light emitting means may be performed continuously. Note that it may not be performed continuously.

(8) Other matters In the above-described embodiments, the image display means is a decorative symbol display means, but the image display means and the decorative symbol display means may be different.
In the above-described embodiment, the image display unit includes the hold display area. However, a hold display unit (for example, a hold display using an LED) may be provided separately from the image display unit.
A plurality (two or more) of image display means may be provided. In that case, each of the decorative pattern (special figure 1, special figure 2), special figure 1 hold display, special figure 2 hold display and fourth figure is either one of the first image display means or the second image display means or It may be provided in both, or may not be provided in both.
The image display means may be operable (for example, movable) as a movable body. In the case where a plurality of image display means are provided, at least one is operable (for example, movable) as a movable body, and at least one is not operable (for example, movable) as a movable body (for example, movable) May be fixed), all of the plurality of image display means may be operable (for example, movable), and all of the plurality of image display means may be operable as a movable body. It may not be (for example, movable).

<Appendix 7>
The present invention described above is
1.
A game board having at least a game area;
Production means capable of executing at least production related to the game,
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of the production means are provided,
At least one presentation means of the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
At least one rendering means among the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
The first effect means is a display means capable of executing at least a display related to the effect,
The display means is capable of executing at least a first display,
The display means is capable of executing at least a second display;
The first display is a display at least associated with the second display;
The second effect means is located on the front side of the first effect means,
The second rendering means is provided with at least a transmission region that can transmit through the back side,
A light emitting means capable of emitting at least light toward the transmission region;
The transmission region is capable of directing light emitted from the light emitting means at least forward,
The transmission region includes at least a first transmission region,
The transmission region includes at least a second transmission region,
The second transmission region is a region other than the first transmission region,
The second effect means is capable of executing at least a light emission effect in front of the display means by causing the first transmission region to emit light,
The first transmission region is located on the front side of at least a part of one of the first display and the second display.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
A variety of performances can be provided, and a game stand that improves the fun of the game can be provided.

  Further, even if one display is difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect, the player may be able to recognize the display with the other display.

  In some cases, one display can be made conspicuous due to the light emission effect. There are cases where the light-emitting effects overlap, and the other display is relatively conspicuous.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
At least a display period in which both the first display and the second display can be displayed is provided,
The second effect means is capable of at least executing the light emission effect on at least a part of the front side of one of the first display and the second display during the display period.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
A variety of performances can be provided, and a game stand that improves the fun of the game can be provided.

  Further, even if one display is difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect, the player may be able to recognize the display with the other display.

  In some cases, one display can be made conspicuous due to the light emission effect. There are cases where the light-emitting effects overlap, and the other display is relatively conspicuous.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. A game machine according to claim 1,
The first display is a display corresponding to first information related at least to a game,
The second display is a display according to the first information.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Even when a light emission effect is performed by performing the same information by a plurality of displays, the information may be reliably notified.

The present invention also provides
4).
3. A game machine according to claim 1,
It is provided with a determination unit for determining whether or not the determination is correct,
The first display is a first symbol display corresponding to at least the result of the success / failure determination,
The second display is a second symbol display corresponding at least to the result of the determination of success or failure.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
One of the symbols is not hidden by the light-emitting effect, so there is a case where information that the player wants to know can be surely notified.

  Further, there are cases where the design can be decorated and made conspicuous by the light emission effect.

The present invention also provides
5.
3. A game machine according to claim 1,
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
The display means is capable of executing at least a first hold display capable of informing at least the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held,
The display means is capable of executing at least a second hold display capable of notifying at least the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held,
The first display is the first hold display,
The second display is the second hold display,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
On the other hand, the hold display may be able to reliably notify the number of holds.

The present invention also provides
6).
5. A game machine according to claim 1,
The first hold display is a hold icon,
The second hold display is a display including at least character information,
The display means is capable of at least executing the first hold display by displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
The display means is capable of executing at least the second hold display for notifying the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held based on the character information.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
The second hold display that is not hidden by the first transparent area may be able to simply inform the player of the number of holds.

  Further, there is a case where the hold icon can be more noticed by the light emission effect.

The present invention also provides
7).
6). A game machine according to claim 1,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of the hold icons,
At least one type of the hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one type of the hold icon of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The display means can at least change the displayed first hold icon to the second hold icon at least in association with the light emission effect being performed.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There is a case where the light emission effect can be associated with a change in the notice made by the display means (the function may be functioned as the notice itself).

The present invention also provides
8).
1. To 7. The game table according to any one of the above,
The first transmission region is one in which the transmission region itself does not emit light.
This is a game table characterized by that.

<Appendix 8>
The present invention described above is
1.
A game board having at least a game area;
Production means capable of executing at least production related to the game,
A game machine equipped with
A plurality of the production means are provided,
At least one presentation means among the plurality of presentation means is a first presentation means,
At least one rendering means among the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
The first effect means is a display means capable of executing at least a display related to the effect,
The display means is capable of executing at least a first display,
The display means is capable of executing at least a second display;
The first display is a display at least associated with the second display;
The second effect means is located on the front side of the first effect means,
The second rendering means is provided with at least a transmission region,
An irradiation unit (for example, a light emitting unit 701) capable of at least irradiating light toward the transmission region;
The light irradiated to the transmission region by the irradiation means can be guided to at least the front side,
The transmission region includes at least a first transmission region,
The transmission region includes at least a second transmission region,
The second transmission region is a region other than the first transmission region,
The second effect means is capable of executing at least a light emission effect on the front side of the display means by causing the first transmission region to emit light,
The first transmission region is located on the front side of at least a part of one of the first display and the second display.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
A variety of performances can be provided, and a game stand that improves the fun of the game can be provided.

  Further, even if one display is difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect, the player may be able to recognize the display with the other display.

  In some cases, one display can be made conspicuous due to the light emission effect. There are cases where the light-emitting effects overlap, and the other display is relatively conspicuous.

The present invention also provides
2.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
At least a display period in which both the first display and the second display can be displayed is provided,
The second effect means (the first transmission region) displays the light emission effect on at least a part of the front side of one of the first display and the second display during the display period. Is at least viable,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
A variety of performances can be provided, and a game stand that improves the fun of the game can be provided.

  Further, even if one display is difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect, the player may be able to recognize the display with the other display.

  In some cases, one display can be made conspicuous due to the light emission effect. There are cases where the light-emitting effects overlap, and the other display is relatively conspicuous.

The present invention also provides
3.
1. Or 2. A game machine according to claim 1,
The first display is a display corresponding to first information related at least to a game,
The second display is a display according to the first information.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Even when a light emission effect is performed by performing the same information by a plurality of displays, the information may be reliably notified.

The present invention also provides
4).
3. A game machine according to claim 1,
It is provided with a determination unit for determining whether or not the determination is correct,
The first display is a first symbol display corresponding to at least the result of the success / failure determination,
The second display is a second symbol display corresponding at least to the result of the determination of success or failure.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
One of the symbols is not hidden by the light-emitting effect, so there is a case where information that the player wants to know can be surely notified.

  Further, there are cases where the design can be decorated and made conspicuous by the light emission effect.

The present invention also provides
5.
3. A game machine according to claim 1,
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
The display means is capable of executing at least a first hold display capable of informing at least the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held,
The display means is capable of executing at least a second hold display capable of notifying at least the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held,
The first display is the first hold display,
The second display is the second hold display,
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
On the other hand, the hold display may be able to reliably notify the number of holds.

The present invention also provides
6).
5. A game machine according to claim 1,
The first hold display is a hold icon,
The second hold display is a display including at least character information,
The display means is capable of at least executing the first hold display by displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
The display means is capable of executing at least the second hold display for notifying the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held based on the character information.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
The second hold display that is not hidden by the first transparent area may be able to simply inform the player of the number of holds.

  Further, there is a case where the hold icon can be more noticed by the light emission effect.

The present invention also provides
7).
6). A game machine according to claim 1,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of the hold icons,
At least one type of the hold icon of the plurality of types of the hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of the hold icon is a second hold icon,
The display means is configured such that at least the first hold icon being displayed can be changed to the second hold icon at least in association with the light emission effect being performed.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There is a case where the light emission effect can be associated with a change in the notice made by the display means (the function may be functioned as the notice itself).

The present invention also provides
8).
1. To 7. The game table according to any one of the above,
The transmissive region is non-self-luminous,
This is a game table characterized by that.

The present invention also provides
A.
4). A game machine according to claim 1,
The display means is capable of executing at least a variable display of decorative symbols,
The display means is capable of executing at least a variation display of a fourth symbol, and the first symbol display is the decorative symbol,
The second symbol display is a fourth symbol,
The first transmission region is capable of at least executing the light emission effect in front of at least a part of the decorative design.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the result of the determination of success / failure can be reliably notified with the fourth symbol.

  Note that there are cases where the decorative symbol variation display and the fourth symbol variation display start simultaneously and stop simultaneously. The decorative symbol variation display may start before the fourth symbol variation display and stop before the fourth symbol variation display. The decorative symbol variation display may start before the fourth symbol variation display and stop afterward. The decorative symbol variation display may start after the fourth symbol variation display and stop first. The decorative symbol variation display may start after the fourth symbol variation display, and may stop later.

  In some cases, the size of the display area of the decorative symbol is larger than the size of the display area of the fourth symbol. The size of the decorative symbol display area may be the same as the size of the fourth symbol display area. The size of the decorative symbol display area may be smaller than the size of the fourth symbol display area.

  The decorative symbol variation display is composed of a plurality of symbol combinations, and the timing at which the player can recognize may differ (reach effect etc. can be executed). For the fourth symbol, the result is notified by one or a plurality of symbols (combinations), but the symbols stop almost simultaneously at the timing of the change stop (the reach effect or the like is not executed).

  The variation display area of the fourth symbol is fixed. Note that the variable display area of the fourth symbol may change.

  The decorative design used is different depending on the gaming state (probability / electric support / production mode, etc.), or the same decorative design is used. The 4th symbol differs only in the 4th symbol for the special figure 1 and the 4th symbol for the special figure 2, and does not depend on the gaming state or the like.

The present invention also provides
B.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
The first transmission region includes at least a third transmission region,
The first transmissive region is provided with at least a fourth transmissive region, and the third transmissive region is a region in front of the display region of the display means,
The fourth transmission area is an area in front of the game area and different from an area in front of the display area of the display means,
The emission effect can be executed in an area including at least a part of the third area and at least a part of the fourth transmission area.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Since the light emission effect can be performed even outside the display area, the interest may be improved.

  In the above-described embodiments, the shutter role or glass emission is used as an example of the production means. However, the production means may be capable of producing the light emission outside the display area, such as glass emission.

The present invention also provides
B '.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
A plurality of the display means are provided;
At least one of the display means is a first display means,
At least one of the display means is a second display means,
The first display means is capable of executing at least the first display,
The second display means is capable of at least executing the second display.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
In some cases, the player can concentrate on paying attention to one of the display means. If you want to pay attention to the production, you should pay attention to the first display means hidden by the issuance of the first transmission area, and if you want to pay attention to the information, the second not hidden in the first transmission area In some cases, attention can be paid to the display means.

As an example of the combination of the first display means and the second display means, for example,
The main liquid crystal display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) may be the first display means, and the sub liquid crystal display means (liquid crystal display device 208i) may be the second display means. In some cases, the first display means and the second display means are reversed.
The main liquid crystal display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is the first display means, and special figure display means (for example, special figure display, universal figure display, special figure hold, universal figure hold, game state display, The display means on which various types of information such as right-handed display are displayed may be the second display means. In some cases, the first display means and the second display means are reversed.
The sub liquid crystal display means may be the first display means, and the special figure display means may be the second display means. In some cases, the first display means and the second display means are reversed.
A panel display lamp having an information notification function such as mode notification is the first display means, and when the same display is performed on various liquid crystal display means, the liquid crystal display means may be the second display means. is there. In some cases, the first display means and the second display means are reversed.

The present invention also provides
C.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
Provide notice means that can at least give notice,
The notice means is capable of at least executing the notice in relation to at least the light emission effect.
The advance notice means is capable of executing the advance notice by changing a display mode of the first display (for example, overlapping the first transmission region).
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
The light emission effect can be made to function as a notice related to the display means. In some cases, the first display can be noticed by functioning as a notice. For example, the change of the hold icon can be executed as a prefetch notice, and the notice means may include a prefetch notice means.

The present invention also provides
C '.
1. A game machine according to claim 1,
A determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure;
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
With
The display means is capable of executing at least a variable display of decorative symbols,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of decorative symbols during one symbol variation display.
If the result of the determination is a big hit, it is possible to derive a decorative symbol form corresponding to the big hit with at least one decorative symbol fluctuation display among the plurality of decorative symbol fluctuation displays,
In the case where the result of the determination of success / failure is out of date, it is possible to derive a decorative design mode corresponding to the outage in all of the decorative design variation displays of the plurality of decorative design variation displays.
At least a part of the decorative symbol variation display of the plurality of decorative symbol variation displays is the first display.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There may be a case where the player can recognize the decorative symbol variation display to be noticed while improving the interest by simultaneously performing a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays.

  In addition, there is a case where a thing that does not form a reach or a big hit is hidden (or difficult to see) by a light emission effect.

  In some cases, a reach or a big hit part is emphasized with a light emission effect.

  In addition, various notice effects such as symbol rewriting notices are also described in C.I. May be applicable as the notice means described in.

(Other)
In addition, the following structures may be sufficient as this invention.

Examples of combinations of the first display means and the second display means include the following. Examples of combinations of the first display unit and the second display unit can be combined with each other as appropriate, including those described above.
In some cases, the ordinary map change effect and the ordinary map display means are the first display means and the second display means. In addition, the special figure variation effect and the special figure display unit may be a first display unit and a second display unit, respectively.
The light emission effect may overlap a part of the roulette effect, and one may be the first display and the other may be the second display. For example, there are cases where the first display and the second display are separated by an effect such as three choices.
A combination of a predetermined notice and another predetermined notice may cause one of the notices to be the first indication and the other to be the second indication.
-One of the same-system notices (for example, step 1 of the step-up notice corresponds to the first display, step 2 corresponds to the second display, etc.) is the first display, and the other is the second display. It may be. In this case, the latest notice may be noticed.
The special symbol 1 of the fourth symbol may be the first display and the special symbol 2 of the fourth symbol may be the second indicator. For example, while the special figure 2 is changing, the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 may be difficult to visually recognize with the light emission effect, or the light emission effect may be performed so that the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is noticed.

  Moreover, the structure which overlaps with both a 1st display and a 2nd display by 1st permeation | transmission area | region (light emission effect) may be sufficient as this invention.

  The first display and the second display may be displayed on one display unit, or may be configured to be displayed separately on a plurality of display units.

  The phenomenon of each embodiment does not need to be performed in all periods. For example, even in the same reach effect (effect performed at the same time determined by the fluctuation time of the special figure), the appearance rate of each notice or the like is generally not 100%. There is a case where an effect overlapping with the first display is performed or not.

  In order to produce an effect that makes the first display stand out, it is not always necessary that the first transmission region overlaps the first display due to the light emission effect. For example, it may be a light emission effect surrounding a display to be conspicuous or a light emission effect specified by an arrow or the like.

The execution of the light emission effect is not limited to that performed during symbol variation. For example, the following timing is assumed, and an effect corresponding to the first display and the second display may be performed.
-During a big hit: There are cases where multiple displays are made with certainty effects. It is also possible to apply the part whether or not the symbol is changed and the one that is notified of certain change by achieving some mission as the first display and the second display.
・ Daitomo (for example, linked system of mobile (for example, mobile phone) and game stand production) is set up ... Various indications of mission achievement and level-up display are the first display and the first related to Daitomo (first information) It is applicable as a secondary display.
-It can also be applied during other demonstrations and screens after power-on.

  The first display and the second display are not necessarily difficult to view due to the light emission effect. Depending on the pattern of the light emission effect, the display may be conspicuous or relatively easy to visually recognize.

<Appendix 9>
The present invention described above is
1.
A game board (eg, game board 200) provided with at least a game area (eg, game area 124);
Transmission means (for example, transmission member 703) provided on the front side of the game board;
A game machine equipped with
Irradiating means (for example, light sources 702A, 702B, 702C, 702D, 702E, 702F, 702G and 702H) capable of at least irradiating light to the transmitting means,
The transmission means is provided with at least first light emitting means (for example, lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, 703de, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The transmitting means is provided with at least second light emitting means (for example, lens cuts 703da, 703db, 703dc, 703dd, 703de, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The first light emitting means is capable of at least guiding the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The second light emitting means is capable of at least guiding the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The first light emitting means can be displayed at least in a first mode (for example, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The second light emitting means is capable of displaying at least in a second mode (for example, patterns 703ba, 703bb, 703ca, 703cb),
The first aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
Various productions can be performed.

  In addition, there are cases where various effects can be performed.

The present invention also provides:
2.
1. In the game table described in
The game board is displayed (for example, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, the fourth symbol area 731a for special figure 1, and the fourth symbol for special figure 2 in FIG. 99 (a). A display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least the area 731b and the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a) is provided;
The transmission means is provided at a position facing at least the display means.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
There may be a variety of effects.

The present invention also provides:
3.
2. In the game table described in
The display includes a first display (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b in FIG. 99 (a)),
The first light emitting means (for example, the pattern 703v) is provided at least on the front side of at least a part of the first display.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
It may be possible to draw attention to the display.

The present invention also provides:
4).
2. Or 3. In the game table described in
The display includes a first display (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b in FIG. 99 (a)),
The second light emitting means (for example, the pattern 703u) is not provided at least on the front side of at least a part of the first display.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
By making the first display clear, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the display.

The present invention also provides:
5.
2. To 4. In the game stand of any one of these,
The display includes a second display (for example, the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a in FIG. 99A),
The first light emitting means (for example, the pattern 703v) is not provided at least on the front side of the second display,
The second light emitting means (for example, the pattern 703u) is not provided at least on the front side of the second display.
Because it is a game stand characterized by that,
By making the second display clear, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the display.

  In addition, there is a case where information important to the player can be constantly confirmed to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  The embodiments of the present invention are not limited to the individual embodiments described above, and any combination of elements of the individual embodiments is included in the present invention, and various modifications that can be conceived by those skilled in the art are also included. Thus, the effects of the present invention are not limited to the above-described contents. That is, various additions, modifications, and partial deletions can be made without departing from the concept and spirit of the present invention derived from the contents defined in the claims and equivalents thereof.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

100 Pachinko machine 102 Outer frame 104 Main body 200 Game board

Claims (5)

A game board having at least a game area;
Transmission means provided on the front side of the game board;
A game machine equipped with
An irradiation unit capable of at least irradiating light to the transmission unit;
The transmitting means is provided with at least a first light emitting means,
The transmitting means is provided with at least a second light emitting means,
The first light emitting means is capable of at least guiding the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The second light emitting means is capable of at least guiding the light irradiated by the irradiation means to the front side,
The first light emitting means is capable of displaying at least in the first aspect,
The second light emitting means is capable of displaying at least in the second aspect,
The first aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of Claim 1,
The game board is provided with display means capable of executing at least display,
The transmission means is provided at a position facing at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand of Claim 2,
The display includes a first display,
The first light emitting means is provided at least on the front side of at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
The display includes a first display,
The second light emitting means is not provided at least on the front side of at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that. In the game stand as described in any one of Claim 2 thru | or 4,
The display includes a second display,
The first light emitting means is not provided at least on the front side of the second display,
The second light emitting means is not provided at least on the front side of the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.